JP6711787B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

When a certain condition is established, if at least one of the effect symbol and the identification symbol displayed on the display means moves toward the other and the integration of the two is established, the result of the determination whether or not the identification symbol corresponds There has been proposed a game machine that executes a notice effect set so as to increase the possibility of winning (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2014-200630, A

In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the notice effect is monotonous.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine having an improved interest.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
A specific display means (for example, a start winning memory display area 5H, a changing special map display area 5I) capable of displaying a specific display (for example, a hold display, an active display) relating to the variable display,
An action effect execution means capable of executing an action effect that changes the display mode of the specific display by causing the effect image to act on the specific display (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of steps S709, S711, and S172). ,
A control unit (for example, a production control microcomputer 90100) for performing control based on the received command (for example, a production control command);
A first storage area in which the received command is initially stored (for example, a reception register included in the serial communication circuit 90115),
A second storage area for temporarily storing the received command (for example, a transfer buffer provided in the internal RAM 90112),
A third storage area (for example, an analysis buffer provided in an external SDRAM 90116) in which the received command is finally stored,
The control means is
First storage control means for reading out a command stored in the first storage area and storing it in the second storage area based on a reception interrupt (for example, serial reception interrupt) generated each time a command is received. (For example, a portion of the effect control microcomputer 90100 that executes steps S90721 to S90723),
Second storage control means for reading out a command stored in the second storage area and storing it in the third storage area based on a timer interrupt that occurs every predetermined period (for example, 1 ms) (for example, effect control). For executing steps S90741 to S90748 in the microcomputer 90100 for use)
Analysis means for analyzing a command stored in the third storage area (for example, a portion of the effect control microcomputer 90100 that executes step S90704),
The action effect execution means changes the start position of the action effect according to the display position of the specific display which is the execution target of the action effect (for example, FIGS. 21 and 23),
The starting position of the working effect is more, the starting position of the working effect is rather easy becomes farther from near position from the specific display of the display position of the execution target of the action effect more of,
As the pattern of the action effect, the first pattern in which the aspect of the effect image does not change before the effect image of the first aspect is displayed and the specific display is operated, and the expectation degree higher than that of the effect image of the first aspect A second pattern in which the aspect of the effect image does not change until the effect image of two aspects is displayed and applied to the specific display, and the aspect of the effect image before the effect image of the first aspect is displayed and applied to the specific display And a third pattern in which is changed to the second aspect,
The expectation is higher in the action effect of the third pattern than in the action effect of the second pattern.
With such a configuration, the interest is improved.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
The start position of the action effect is a first position (for example, the lower left of the image display device 5), and a second position (for example, the lower right of the image display device 5) that is farther than the first position with respect to the specific display, Therefore, the start position of the action effect may be more likely to be the second position than the first position.
According to such a configuration, attention can be paid to the effect and the interest is improved.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
It is possible to control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state),
The action effect executing means is capable of executing the action effect in a special state (e.g., a time saving state) that is controlled after the advantageous state ends (for example, if YES in step S708, the process of S709 is performed). May be performed).
With such a configuration, the interest is improved.

(4) In the gaming machine of (2) above,
The action effect targeting the specific display farthest from the second position (for example, the hold display of the hold display number 1) has an execution start timing earlier than the action effect targeting the other specific display. Good.
With such a configuration, the interest is improved.

(5) In the gaming machine of (2) above,
In the action effect targeting the specific display farthest from the second position (for example, the hold display of the hold display number 1), the effect image acts on the specific display more than in the action effect targeting another specific display. The timing may be early.
With such a configuration, the interest is improved.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
As the display mode of the specific display, there are a normal mode (for example, white) and a special mode (for example, blue, green, red) that can be changed from the normal mode by the execution of the action effect,
When displaying a specific display (for example, the hold display of the hold display number 4) that is not the execution target of the action effect, the specific display may be displayed in the special mode.
With such a configuration, the interest is improved.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
The specific display includes a hold display corresponding to the variable display before execution, and a running display (for example, active display) corresponding to the variable display being executed,
The action effect execution means can execute a special action effect as the action effect targeting the in-execution display,
The start position of the special effect may be different from the start position of the special effect (for example, FIG. 23D).
With such a configuration, the interest is improved.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above,
It has a movable object (for example, role object 200) that performs a predetermined operation, and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous for the player (for example, a big hit game state),
An action effecting means capable of executing an action effect of causing the movable object to move to a position covering at least a part of a specific display area (for example, a start winning prize memory display area 5H, a changing special figure display area 5I) in which the specific display is displayed. When,
Change effecting means capable of executing change effect suggesting the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state by changing the display mode of the specific display,
And a suggestion producing means capable of executing suggestion producing suggesting whether or not the display mode of the specific display changes over a predetermined period before execution of the change producing,
When performing the action effect during the predetermined period, the action effecting means operates the movable object so as not to be covered by the specific display at least when the change effect is performed (for example, FIG. 24). May be.
With such a configuration, even when the movable object can move to a position covering at least a part of the specific display area, the movable object moves to a position not covered by the specific display when the change effect is executed. Therefore, the player can promptly confirm the change mode of the specific display. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above,
The display mode of the effect image may be changed (for example, FIG. 25) in the period from the time when the effect image is displayed until the action effect is executed.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game in the process before executing the effect production.

The modes for carrying out the invention described later include the inventions related to the following means A1 to means A6. Conventionally, in a gaming machine, a reception register (FIFO) is monitored at a timing of a certain period as shown in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2009-248158, and in a normal reception process, a reception register using a timer interrupt is used. A gaming machine is known in which data stored in (FIFO) is taken out and registered in a command buffer (analysis buffer). However, in such a gaming machine, when a large number of commands are received, the reception register (FIFO) becomes full, and the commands may be missed. In view of this point, it is required to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the omission of commands when a large number of commands are received.

(Means A1) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to another aspect is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and a control means for controlling based on a received command (for example, a production control command). (For example, a production control microcomputer 90100), a first storage area in which the received command is first stored (for example, a reception register included in the serial communication circuit 90115), and a second storage in which the received command is temporarily stored. The control unit includes an area (for example, a transfer buffer provided in the internal RAM 90112) and a third storage area (for example, an analysis buffer provided in the external SDRAM 90116) in which the received command is finally stored. , A first storage control means for reading a command stored in the first storage area and storing the command in the second storage area based on a reception interrupt (for example, serial reception interrupt) generated each time a command is received ( For example, the command stored in the second storage area is read out based on a portion of the effect control microcomputer 90100 that executes steps S90721 to S90723) and a timer interrupt that occurs every predetermined period (for example, 1 ms). Second storage control means for storing in the third storage area (for example, the portion of the effect control microcomputer 90100 that executes steps S90741 to S90748), and analysis means for analyzing the command stored in the third storage area ( For example, the portion for executing step S90704 in the effect control microcomputer 90100) is included. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the omission of commands when a large number of commands are received.

(Means A2) In the means A1, the second storage area is provided in the RAM included in the control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 51, the built-in RAM 90112 is provided with a transfer buffer). It may have been done. With such a configuration, the command can be transferred from the first storage area to the second storage area at high speed.

(Means A3) In the means A1 or the means A2, the first storage control means reads the command stored in the first storage area based on the occurrence of a predetermined number (for example, 10) of reception interrupts. 57 to store in the second storage area (for example, in the modification shown in FIG. 57, the effect control microcomputer 90100 executes steps S90721 to S90723 when Y is determined in step S90752). May be. According to such a configuration, the process of transferring the command from the first storage area to the second storage area is performed only once every predetermined number of reception interrupts, thereby reducing the processing time for each interrupt. can do.

(Means A4) In any one of the means A1 to A3, the second storage area has a larger storage capacity than the first storage area, and the third storage area has a larger storage capacity than the second storage area. The capacity is large (for example, as shown in FIG. 51, the capacity of the reception register of the serial communication circuit 90115 is 16 bytes, whereas the capacity of the transfer buffer is as large as 128 bytes, and the analysis buffer (upper) and The capacity of the analysis buffer (lower level) may be 256 bytes and larger). With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the missed command by increasing the storage capacity of the storage area of the transfer destination.

(Means A5) In any one of the means A1 to A4, the second storage control means causes the capacity of the command stored in the second storage area to reach the maximum value of the storage capacity of the second storage area. In this case, the command stored in the second storage area is read out and stored in the third storage area irrespective of the occurrence of the timer interrupt (for example, it is determined as Y in step S90724 in the effect control microcomputer 90100). (Sometimes steps S90725 to S90734 are executed). According to such a configuration, when the second storage area is full, the command can be moved to the third storage area as much as possible to reduce the missed command.

(Means A6) In any one of the means A1 to A5, the third storage area stores a first area (for example, an analysis buffer (upper)) for storing the higher order data of the command and lower order data for the command. The second storage control means stores the upper data of the command read from the second storage area in the first area (for example, an effect control micro). The computer 90100 executes step S90745), and stores the lower data of the command read from the second storage area in the second area (for example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 executes step S90746). May be. According to such a configuration, missed commands in the second storage area can be reduced.

It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is the explanation drawing which shows one example etc of contents of production control command. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the game random number value counted by the main board side. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a special figure display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a jackpot type determination table. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a data holding area for game control. It is the figure which shows the constitution example and the like of production control pattern. It is a block diagram etc. which show the structural example of the data holding area for effect control. It is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a starting winning determination processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of a random number determination process at the time of winning. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control main processing. It is the flowchart which shows production control process treatment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of specific display processing. It is a figure which shows an example of a final display mode determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a specific display change pattern. It is a figure which shows the determination rate of action effect execution presence or absence. It is a figure showing a list of action production control patterns. It is a timing chart which shows the execution timing of action production. It is the figure which shows the production operation example of action production. It is a figure which shows the example of a production|operation production of the action production of a modification. It is a figure which shows the example of a production|operation production of the action production of a modification. It is the front view which saw the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of a game control board (main board). It is the block diagram which shows the circuit configuration example of the production control baseplate, the lamp driver baseplate and the audio output baseplate. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing which CPU in a main board performs. It is a flow chart which shows a 4ms timer interruption processing in a game control microcomputer. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is an explanatory view showing a big hit judgment table, a small hit judgment table, and a big hit type judgment table. It is the explanation drawing which shows one example of the contents of production control command. It is the explanation drawing which shows one example of the contents of production control command. It is a flowchart showing an example of a program of special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of a program of special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows starting opening switch passage processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a storage buffer. It is a flow chart which shows special design normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows special design normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows change pattern setting processing. 7 is a flowchart showing a display result designation command transmission process. It is a flowchart showing a process during special symbol fluctuation. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart showing a big hit ending process. It is a flow chart showing an example of a program of special symbol display control processing. It is the block diagram which shows the constitution example of the production control microcomputer. It is the explanation drawing which shows one example of the address map in the production control microcomputer. It is a figure which shows the structural example of an interrupt control register for serial reception interrupt setting, and an example of the setting content. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a timer interrupt setting register, and an example of a setting content. It is an explanatory view showing an example of composition of a reception register and each reception buffer. It is the flowchart which shows the production control main processing which CPU for production control executes. It is the flowchart which shows the 1ms timer interruption processing in the production control microcomputer. It is a flow chart which shows transfer buffer transfer processing. It is a flow chart which shows analysis buffer transfer processing. It is the flowchart which shows production control process treatment. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the transfer buffer transfer process.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine in the present embodiment, showing a layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. In the game board 2, a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails is formed. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball hitting launch device and is driven into it.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the right side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1), a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot-matrix LED (light emitting diode), etc., and is identified in the special symbol game as an example of the variable display game. Special symbols (also called "special symbols") that are possible plural types of identification information (special identification information) are variably displayed (variably displayed). For example, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B each variably display a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-". To do. In addition, the special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are limited to those composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. However, for example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns with different combinations of what is turned on and what is turned off in the 7-segment LED may be set in advance as a plurality of types of special symbols.

Symbol numbers corresponding to each of the special symbols of a plurality of types are attached. As an example, each of the numbers indicating “0” to “9” is assigned a symbol number of “0” to “9”, and the symbol indicating “−” is assigned a symbol number of “10”. Just do it. Below, the special symbols that are variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also referred to as "first special symbols", and the special symbols that are variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also referred to as "second special symbols". ..

Both the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are formed, for example, in a rectangular shape. The type of the first special figure and the type of the second special figure may be the same (for example, the numbers indicating "0" to "9" and the symbol indicating "-"), or the types may be different. May be different. Further, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B may be respectively configured to variably display numbers (or two-digit symbols) indicating, for example, "00" to "99". ..

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the image display device 5, corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game, respectively. In the decorative pattern display area, which is a plurality of variable display portions such as three, for example, decorative patterns that are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) capable of identifying each are variably displayed. The variable display of the decorative pattern is also included in the variable display game.

As an example, in the display area of the image display device 5, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged. Then, in the special figure game, in response to the start of one of the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A and the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B, The variation (for example, vertical scroll display) of the decorative pattern is started in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. After that, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as the variable display result in the special symbol game, in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R in the image display device 5. The fixed decorative design (final stop design) that is the variable display result of the decorative design is stopped and displayed.

Thus, in the display area of the image display device 5, a special drawing game using the first special drawing in the first special symbol display device 4A, or a special special game using the second special drawing in the second special symbol display device 4B. In synchronism with the drawing game, a plurality of types of distinguishable decorative patterns that can be identified are variably displayed, and the fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result is derived (or simply referred to as “derived”). Note that, for example, deriving and displaying various display symbols such as a special symbol and a decorative symbol means terminating the variable display by displaying the identification information such as the decorative symbol in a stop display (also called a complete stop display or a final stop display). . On the other hand, during variable display from the start of variable display of the decorative pattern to the derivation display of the fixed decorative pattern which is the variable display result, the variable speed of the decorative pattern becomes “0”, and The design may be displayed in a stopped state, and may be in a display state that causes, for example, slight shaking or expansion/contraction. Such a display state is also called a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not definitely displayed, the player can recognize that the variation of the decorative pattern due to the scroll display or the update display is not progressing. Becomes It should be noted that the temporary stop display may include displaying the decorative pattern in a complete stop display for a time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) without causing a slight shake or expansion/contraction.

The decorative patterns that are variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R include, for example, eight types of patterns (alphanumeric characters “1” to “8” or Chinese characters). It may be a number, an English character, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, characters or symbols and a character image, and the character image may be, for example, a person, an animal, an object other than these, or , A symbol such as a character, or a decorative image showing any other figure). A corresponding design number is attached to each of the decorative designs. For example, the symbol numbers “1” to “8” are attached to the alphanumeric characters indicating “1” to “8”, respectively. Note that the decorative patterns are not limited to eight types, and may be of any type (eg, seven types or nine types) as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as a big hit combination and a lost combination can be configured.

After the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" are displayed until the fixed decorative pattern which is the variable display result is derived and displayed. In, for example, scroll display is performed such that the symbol numbers flow from upper to lower sequentially from the smallest to the largest, and when the decorative symbol with the largest symbol number (for example, “8”) is displayed, The decorative design with the smallest design number (for example, "1") is displayed. Alternatively, in at least any one of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, the "left" decorative symbol display area 5L, etc.), scroll display is performed from a symbol with a large symbol number to a symbol with a small symbol number. When the decorative design with the smallest number is displayed, the decorative design with the largest design number may be displayed subsequently.

In the display area of the image display device 5, a start winning prize memory display area 5H is arranged. In the starting winning a prize memory display area 5H, a hold memory display (hold display) is displayed that allows the number of variable displays held corresponding to the special figure game (special figure hold storage number) to be specified. Here, in the suspension of the variable display corresponding to the special drawing game, the game ball passes through the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B. It is generated based on the start winning a prize by entering. That is, the starting condition (also referred to as “execution condition”) for executing the variable display game such as the special drawing game and the variable display of the decorative pattern is satisfied, but the variable display game based on the previously satisfied start condition is being executed. If the start condition that allows the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the jackpot gaming state, etc., the variable display corresponding to the established starting condition is suspended. Done. Whether the reserved memory display in the starting winning prize memory display area 5H is generated based on the starting winning prize due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning prize hole, or the second starting winning prize hole is displayed by the gaming ball. The display mode (for example, display color or shape) may be changed depending on whether or not it is generated based on a start winning a prize by passing (entering).

In the display area of the image display device 5, a moving special figure display area 5I is provided on the left side of the starting winning prize memory display area 5H. An image corresponding to the variable display currently being executed is displayed in the changing special map display area 5I. The display corresponding to the currently executed variable display is also referred to as an in-execution display, an active display, a variable display corresponding display, or the like. The running display and the pending storage display are collectively referred to as a specific display. While the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is being executed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first start winning hole, it is executed as a circular shape in the changing special figure display area 5I. Medium display is displayed. Further, while the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is being executed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second starting winning opening, it is a circular shape in the changing symbol display area 5I. A running display is displayed. That is, when the first or second start condition is satisfied, the display removed from the starting winning prize memory display area 5H is shifted and displayed in the changing special figure display area 5I. Even if the player can grasp which of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B the special symbol game is being executed by the display of the changing special symbol display area 5I. Good. It should be noted that the size and shape of the hold storage display and the display during execution may be different.

In the example shown in FIG. 1, together with the start winning memory display area 5H, the first special hold for displaying the special figure hold storage number in a specifiable manner at the upper part of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. A display device 25A and a second hold display device 25B are provided. The first reserved display device 25A displays the number of the first special figure reserved memories so that it can be specified. The second reserved display device 25B displays the number of second special figure reserved memories so that it can be specified. The first special figure reservation storage number is the number of memories in which execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended. The second special figure reservation storage number is the number of memories in which execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended. The variable display pending storage number obtained by adding the first special figure pending storage number and the second special figure pending storage number is also referred to as a total pending storage number in particular. When simply saying "the number of special figure reservation storages", it usually means a concept including all of the number of first special figure reservation storages, the number of second special figure reservation storages and the total number of reservation storages. The first special figure reserved storage number and the second special figure reserved storage number are included, but the total reserved storage number is excluded).

Below the image display device 5, a normal winning ball device 6A and a normal variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The normal winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting area (first starting area) that is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The ordinary variable winning ball device 6B is an electric motor having a pair of movable wing pieces which are changed between a normal open state in which it is in a vertical position and an expanded open state in which it is in a tilted position by a solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory shown in FIG. A tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) is provided, and a start area (second start area) second start winning opening is formed.

As an example, in the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B, when the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position, so that the game ball passes through (enters) the second starting winning port. It is difficult to open normally. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the game ball passes through the second starting winning port by the tilting control in which the movable wing piece is in the tilting position when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is on. It will be in an enlarged open state that is easy to enter. Although the normal variable winning ball device 6B allows the game ball to enter the second starting winning port even when it is in the normally open state, it is possible that the game ball enters as compared to when it is in the enlarged opening state. It may be configured to be low. Alternatively, the normal variable winning prize ball device 6B may be configured so that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening by closing the second starting winning opening in the normally open state. As described above, the second starting winning opening as the second starting area is in an expanded open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters), and a normal open state in which the game ball does not easily pass (enter) or cannot pass (enter). Changes to.

The game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. 2, for example. The game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by, for example, the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball, and the first special figure reserved storage number is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, " 4”) or less, the first start condition is satisfied. Based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the second start opening switch 22B, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball, and the second special figure reservation storage number is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, " 4”) or less, the second start condition is satisfied. The number of award balls paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first starting opening switch 22A and the number of award balls paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second starting opening switch 22B. May be the same or different from each other.

A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a special winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door shown in FIG. 2, and the specific region is changed to an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. To form a big prize hole.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is in the OFF state, the special winning opening door closes the special winning opening, and the game ball passes through (enters) the special winning opening. Disable it. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is in the on state, the special winning opening door opens the special winning opening, and the game ball passes through (enters) the special winning opening. ) Make it easier. In this way, the special winning opening as a specific area changes between an open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) and is advantageous for the player, and a closed state where the game ball cannot pass (entry) and is disadvantageous to the player. To do. Instead of the closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) the special winning opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state in which the game ball does not easily pass (enter) the special winning opening may be provided.

The game ball that has passed (entered) the special winning opening is detected by the count switch 23 shown in FIG. 2, for example. Based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) the special winning opening which has been opened in the special variable winning ball device 7, the game ball passes through another winning opening such as the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. More prize balls will be paid out than when you pass (enter). Therefore, when the special winning opening is opened in the special variable winning ball device 7, the game ball can enter the special winning opening, which is the first state advantageous for the player. On the other hand, if the special winning opening is closed in the special variable winning ball device 7, it becomes impossible or difficult for the player to obtain a winning ball by passing (entering) the game ball into the special winning opening, which makes it difficult for the player. It becomes a disadvantageous second state.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1), a normal symbol display device 20 is provided. As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of 7-segment or dot-matrix LEDs and the like like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and is a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbol. The ordinary pattern (also called "general drawing" or "normal drawing") is variably displayed (variable display). Such variable display of normal symbols is called a normal figure game (also called "normal figure game").

Above the normal symbol display device 20, a universal symbol holding display device 25C is provided. The universal figure reservation indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of stored universal figure reservations as the number of effective passage balls that have passed through the passage gate 41.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill and a large number of obstacle nails that change the flow direction and speed of the game ball. Further, as the winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the big winning opening, for example, a single or a plurality of general winning openings that are always kept open by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. May be In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as a prize ball based on the fact that the game ball that has entered one of the general winning openings has been detected by a predetermined general winning ball switch. At the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an outlet for taking in the game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 is provided in the periphery of the game area. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure (for example, the normal winning ball device 6A, the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 1. At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball as a game medium toward a game area is provided. For example, the hit ball operation handle adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The hit ball operation handle may be provided with a single-shot launch switch for stopping the drive of the launch motor included in the ball launch device, and a touch ring (touch sensor).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball rented out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball striking device. The upper plate (striking ball supply plate) is provided. At the lower part of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a lower plate that holds (stores) surplus balls overflowing from the upper plate so that they can be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

A stick controller 31A that can be held by a player and tilted is attached to a member that forms the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate body (for example, a central portion of the lower plate). There is. The stick controller 31A includes an operating stick held by the player, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operating stick (for example, a position where the index finger of the operating hand is applied when the player holds the operating stick). There is. The trigger button can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a push-pull operation with a predetermined operating finger (for example, an index finger) while the player holds the operation rod of the stick controller 31A with an operating hand (for example, the left hand). It may be configured as follows. It suffices that a trigger sensor that detects a predetermined instruction operation such as a push/pull operation with respect to the trigger button is built in the operation rod.

A tilting direction sensor unit for detecting a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod may be provided inside the main body of the lower plate below the stick controller 31A. For example, the tilt direction sensor unit is two transmissive photosensors (parallel sensors) arranged parallel to the board surface of the game board 2 on the left side of the center position of the operating rod when viewed from the side of the player who faces the pachinko gaming machine 1. Pair) and four transmission type photosensors (vertical sensor pairs) that are arranged perpendicularly to the board surface of the game board 2 on the right side of the center position of the operating rod when viewed from the player side. It may be configured to include a photo sensor.

As a member forming the upper plate, for example, a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 31A). It is provided. The push button 31B may be configured to be capable of mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically detecting a predetermined instruction operation, such as a pressing operation by the player. A push sensor for detecting a player's operation performed on the push button 31B may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 31B.

Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be schematically described.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as that the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 provided in the game area is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. 2, the variable display of the ordinary symbol is executed on the ordinary symbol display device 20. After the universal figure starting condition for is satisfied, the ordinary symbol display device 20 is based on the establishment of the universal figure starting condition for starting the variable display of the ordinary symbol such as the ending of the previous universal figure game. The public figure game by is started.

In this public figure game, after the fluctuation of the normal symbol is started, when the predetermined time which is the general figure fluctuation time elapses, the fixed normal symbol which is the variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, as a fixed ordinary symbol, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol for a regular symbol) such as a number indicating “7” is stopped and displayed, the variable display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “a symbol for a regular symbol”. On the other hand, as a fixed ordinary symbol, for example, if a regular symbol other than the regular symbol, such as a number or a symbol other than the number indicating “7”, is stopped and displayed, the variable display result of the regular symbol is “general symbol loss”. Become. In response to the fact that the variable display result of the ordinary symbol is "universal symbol", the expansion opening control (tilt control) is performed in which the movable wing pieces of the electric tulip constituting the normally variable winning ball device 6B are in the tilted position. When a predetermined time elapses, the normal opening control for returning to the vertical position is performed.

After the first start condition is satisfied, for example, after the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. The special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied because the previous special figure game or the jackpot gaming state has ended. In addition, the second starting condition is satisfied because the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Later, for example, the special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied due to, for example, the last special figure game or the jackpot gaming state being completed.

In the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, after starting the variable display of the special symbol, when the variable display time as the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the variable display of the special symbol The finalized special symbol (result of special symbol display) that results is derived and displayed. At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, the result is "big hit", and a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. If so, the predetermined display result is a "small hit". Also, if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol, it becomes "miss".

After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", the big hit as a specific game state (advantageous state, specific state) in which a round advantageous to the player (also called "round game") is executed a predetermined number of times Controlled to the gaming state. After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", the small hit game state is controlled as a special game state different from the big hit game state.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment, as an example, the special symbols indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, and “7” are the big hit symbols, and the special symbols indicating the numbers “2” are the small hit symbols. , The special symbol indicating the symbol "-" is a lost symbol. It should be noted that each symbol such as the big hit symbol, the small hit symbol, and the lost symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is a special symbol different from each symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. Alternatively, the special symbols common to both the special symbol games may be the big hit symbol, the small hit symbol, and the lost symbol.

After the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game and becomes the "big hit" as the specific display result, in the big hit game state, the big winning opening door of the special variable winning ball device 7 has a predetermined upper limit time. The special winning opening is opened for a period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 0.1 seconds) or until a predetermined number (for example, 9) of winning balls are generated. As a result, a round in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is brought into the first state (open state), which is advantageous for the player, is executed.

The special winning a prize sphere device, by receiving the game ball falling on the surface of the game board 2, and then closing the special winning a prize, the big award entrance door which opened the big award winning prize during the execution of the round. 7 is changed to a second state (closed state), which is disadvantageous to the player, and one round is ended. The round which is the opening cycle of the special winning opening can be repeatedly executed until the number of times of execution reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, "15"). Even before the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit, the execution of the round may be ended by the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, a game ball has not been won in the special winning opening). ..

Among the rounds in the big hit game state, the round in which the upper limit time for setting the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state (open state) advantageous to the player is a relatively long time (for example, 29 seconds) is normally opened. Also called a round. On the other hand, a round in which the upper limit time for which the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the first state (open state) is a relatively short time (for example, 0.1 seconds) is also called a short-term open round.

Of the special symbols showing the numbers "3", "5", "7" which are big hit symbols, the special symbols showing the numbers "3", "7" are usually open round big hit symbols, and the number "5" The special design that indicates is a short-term open round jackpot design. In the special opening game, the special opening winning jackpot of the special variable winning a prize ball device 7 in the jackpot gaming state (normal opening jackpot state) as the normal opening round specific game state that is controlled after the jackpot pattern is released. The door opens the special winning opening until a predetermined upper limit time (29 seconds, for example), which is the first period, or a predetermined number (for example, 9) of winning balls are generated. By doing so, a round for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state (open state) advantageous to the player is executed. The normal open jackpot state is also called the first specific game state.

Short-term open round as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game Short-term open round controlled after the big-hit symbol is derived In the big-hit gaming state as a specific game state (short-term open big-hit state), the special variable winning ball device 7 is used in each round The second period (for example, 0) in which the upper limit time (upper limit of the period during which the special winning opening is opened by the special winning opening door) is shorter than the first period in the normal opening big hit state, is changed to the first state that is advantageous to the player. . 1 second). It should be noted that in the short-term open big hit state, the opening period of the special winning opening may be controlled to be the second period, and other controls may be performed in the same manner as in the normal open big hit state. Alternatively, in the short-time open jackpot state, the number of rounds executed may be the second round number (eg, “2”) smaller than the first round number (eg, “15”) in the normal open jackpot state.

In such a short-term open big hit state, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of payout balls (prize balls) can be obtained if a game ball wins the big winning opening. However, the opening period of the special winning opening is the second period (0.1 second or the like), which is very short. Therefore, the short-term open big hit state is a big hit game state in which a payout (prize ball) is not substantially obtained. The short-term open jackpot state is also called the second specific game state.

In addition, the big hit game state as the short-term open round specific game state is not limited to the short-open period of the big winning opening compared to the big hit game state as the normal open round specific playing state. For example, the big winning opening is opened. The period (upper limit time) is the same in the short-term open round specific game state and the normal open-round specific game state, but in the short-term open round specific game state, the upper limit number of times (eg, 2 times) that the special winning opening is in the open state is It may be smaller than the upper limit number of times (for example, 15 times) in the normal opening round specific game state. That is, in the big hit game state as the short-term open round specific game state, the period in which the game ball easily passes (enters) the special winning opening in each round is changed from the first period in the normal open round specific game state. The second period is also short, and the number of times the round is executed is the second round number which is smaller than the first round number in the normal open round specific game state, so long as it is at least one of them. ..

After the special symbol indicating the number "2" which is the small hit symbol is derived as the fixed special symbol in the special symbol game, it is controlled to the small hit game state as the special game state. In this small hitting game state, as in the short-term open big hitting state, a variable winning operation is performed in the special variable winning ball device 7 to change the special winning opening to the first state (open state) advantageous to the player. That is, in the small hitting game state, for example, the operation of setting the special variable winning ball device 7 in the first state (open state) is repeatedly executed for the second period.

In the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5, a special figure game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and Of the special figure games using the second special figure on the second special symbol display device 4B, corresponding to the start of any special figure game, the variable display of the decorative symbols is started. Then, from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern to the end of the variable display by the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R Then, the variable display state of the decorative pattern may be a predetermined reach state.

Here, the reach state is a decorative pattern which is not yet stopped and displayed when the decorative pattern stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the big hit combination (“reach variation pattern”). (Also referred to as) is a display state in which the variation continues, or a display state in which all or a part of the decorative patterns form a whole or a part of the big hit combination and are changing in synchronization. Specifically, in part of the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R (for example, "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R, etc.), in advance. The remaining decorative pattern display area (for example, "medium" decoration) that is not yet stopped and displayed when the decorative pattern (for example, the decorative pattern indicating the alphanumeric character "7") that constitutes the determined jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. In the display state where the decorative pattern is changing in the pattern display area 5C or the like, or the decorative pattern is a big hit in all or part of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R It is a display state in which all or a part of the combination is configured and is changing in synchronization.

In addition, in response to the reach state, the changing speed of the decorative design is reduced, or a character image (effect image imitating a person or the like) different from the decorative design is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. By changing the display mode of the background image, playing back and displaying a moving image that is different from the decorative pattern, or changing the variation mode of the decorative pattern, a performance action different from that before the reach state is executed. May be done. The effect operation such as the display of the character image, the change of the display mode of the background image, the reproduction display of the moving image, and the change of the variation mode of the decorative pattern is referred to as reach effect display (or simply reach effect). In the reach effect, not only the display operation in the image display device 5, but also the voice output operation by the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation (flashing operation) in the light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9, etc. are put in the reach state. An operation mode different from the previous operation mode may be included.

As the effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of kinds of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. And, the possibility of becoming a "big hit" (also called "reliability" or "big hit reliability") is different in each reach mode. That is, it is possible to change the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” depending on which of a plurality of types of reach effects is executed.

As an example, in this embodiment, reach modes such as normal reach, super reach α, and super reach β are preset. And, when the reach mode of super reach such as super reach α or super reach β appears, the variable display result may be “big hit”, compared to the case where the reach form of normal reach appears (big hit expectation degree) Becomes higher.

During the variable display of the decorative pattern, unlike the reach effect, the variable display state of the decorative pattern may be the reach state, the variable display result may be a "big hit", etc. A variable display effect for notifying the player may be executed by a variable display mode of the decorative pattern. In this embodiment, variable display effects such as "slip" and "pseudo-run" can be executed. Whether or not the variable display effect such as “slip” or “pseudo-relation” is executed should be determined in response to the change pattern being determined on the main board 11 side. It should be noted that whether or not the variable display effect of “slip” is executed on the effect control board 12 side may be determined regardless of the variation pattern determined on the main board 11 side.

In the variable display effect of "slip", after changing the decorative design in all of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, a plurality of decorative design display areas (for example, After temporarily displaying the decorative designs in the "left" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5R, etc., a predetermined number (for example, "1" or "2" of the temporarily displayed decorative design display areas) By changing the decorative pattern again in the decorative pattern display area (for example, one or both of the “left” decorative pattern display area 5L and the “right” decorative pattern display area 5R), the display is stopped. The effect display for changing the decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed is performed. Thus, in the variable display effect of "slip", a plurality of decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed after the variable display of the decorative symbols is started until the fixed decorative symbol that is the variable display result is derived and displayed. When the variable display state of the decorative pattern is changed to the reach state by executing the variable display again for the decorative pattern of No., and when the decorative pattern forming the non-reach combination is not stopped and the stop pattern is displayed. is there.

In the variable display effect of "pseudo-run", the variable display is started after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started in response to one of the first start condition and the second start condition of the special drawing game being satisfied once. Before the finalized decorative design as a result is derived and displayed, after temporarily displaying the decorative design in all of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, The effect display in which the decorative patterns are changed again (pseudo continuous fluctuation) in all the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R can be performed a predetermined number of times (for example, up to three times). The number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations is the "Left", "Middle", and "Right" decorative pattern display, excluding the initial fluctuation from the start of variable display of decorative patterns until the first temporary stop of all decorative patterns. This is the number of times the decorative pattern is changed again in all of the areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the variable display effect of "pseudo-run", in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right", for example, one of a plurality of predetermined pseudo-run chances The decorative pattern forming the is temporarily stopped and displayed as a predetermined display result. After that, the pseudo continuous fluctuation (revariable display) is performed. In the present embodiment, in the variable display effect of "pseudo-repeated", the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once because the pseudo-repeated change (re-change) is performed once to three times. Based on this, the variable display of the decorative pattern can be displayed as if it was started 2 to 4 times in succession. It should be noted that the number of pseudo-continuous changes (re-changes) in the variable display effect of "pseudo-continuous" may be performed more than once to three times, for example, four times or five times.

As the variable display effect using the variable display operation of such a decorative pattern, in addition to “slip” and “pseudo-relation”, for example, “developing opportunity eyes”, “developing opportunity eyes ending”, “chance eyes stopping after sliding” Various performance operations such as the above may be executed. Here, in the variable display effect of "development opportunity eye", from the start of variable display of the decorative pattern to the derivation display of the fixed decorative pattern which is the variable display result, "left", "middle", "right" In all of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative patterns forming the development opportunity included in the predetermined special combination are temporarily stopped and then the variable display state of the decorative patterns is reached. As a predetermined reach effect is started. As a result, when the decorative pattern forming the development opportunity is temporarily stopped and displayed, the variable display state of the decorative pattern becomes the reach state, and the variable display result becomes the "big hit" after the reach state. Expectations are increased.

Further, in the variable display effect of "end of development opportunity", after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, all of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R are displayed. The effect display is performed in which the decorative pattern of a predetermined combination as the development opportunity item is derived and displayed as the fixed decorative pattern. In the variable display effect of "slip after chance stop", like the variable display effect of "pseudo-run", from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern to the derivation display of the fixed decorative pattern which is the variable display result. , "Left", "Middle", "Right" in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, after temporarily displaying the decorative pattern of the miss combination (special combination) which is the pseudo consecutive chance in all, Unlike the variable display effect of "pseudo-run" in which the decorative pattern is changed again in all of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative pattern is changed again in a part of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. By doing so, effect display for changing the decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed is performed.

Unlike the reach effect or variable display effects such as "slip" or "pseudo-relation", the decorative effect is displayed during variable display, for example, a predetermined effect image is displayed, image display or voice output as a message, lamp There is a possibility that the variable display state of the decorative pattern may reach the reach state due to a production operation different from the variable display operation of the decorative pattern, such as lighting, or the reach production by the super reach may be executed. In some cases, a notice effect may be executed to notify the player in advance that the variable display result may be a “big hit”. The presentation operation that is the notice production is the variable display state of the decorative pattern after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started in all of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. May be executed (started) before the state becomes the reach state (before the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R). Further, the notice effect for notifying that the variable display result may be a “big hit” may include what is executed after the variable display state of the decorative pattern becomes the reach state.

The advance notice effect includes a prefetch advance notice effect (also referred to as a prefetch advance notice). The look-ahead notice effect is a notice effect that can be executed based on the pending information of the special figure game, etc. before starting the variable display, which is the target of the possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit". is there. In particular, the look-ahead preview effect that continuously announces the possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit" over the variable display of the decorative pattern that is executed multiple times corresponding to the special drawing game multiple times is a continuous preview effect. Also called.

As a pre-reading notice effect, a variable display to be noticed is changed by changing the hold memory display that displays the number of special figure hold memories in the starting winning memory display area 5H so that it can be specified, in a display mode different from the display mode in normal time. In, a hold display notice may be executed to give a notice of the possibility of a “big hit”. For example, a hold display notice may be executed to display the hold storage display in the starting prize winning storage display area 5H in a special mode different from the normal display mode at a predetermined timing.

In addition to the starting winning prize memory display area 5H, the prefetching notice effect may be executed in the changing special map display area 5I. In this embodiment, the pending storage display removed from the starting winning award storage display area 5H in response to the completion of the suspension will be shifted and displayed in the changing special figure display area 5I. When the reserved memory display is made in the special mode in the starting winning prize memory display area 5H, when shifting to the changing special map display area 5I, the running display in the changing special map display area 5I is also the special mode. You may do so. By doing so, even when the look-ahead notice effect is executed at a stage where the number of reserved memories is small, it is possible to increase the chances of changing the display mode to the special mode, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Further, in this embodiment, in addition to such prefetching notice effect, when the variable display is executed, the variable display result is a “big hit” based on the variation pattern of the variable display and the variable display result. The changing notice production is performed so that the possibility of being changed is announced. The fluctuating notice effect may be any one that gives a notice of the possibility of a "big hit" by displaying an effect image, outputting a sound, lighting a lamp, operating a performance effect, or a combination thereof.

As a fixed special symbol in the special symbol game, when a special symbol that is a lost symbol is stopped (derived), the variable display state of the decorative symbol does not reach the reach state after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In some cases, a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined non-reach combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display mode of the decorative pattern is referred to as a “non-reach” (also referred to as “normal loss”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “miss”.

As a fixed special symbol in the special symbol game, when a special symbol that is a lost symbol is stopped (derived), the variable display of the decorative symbol is started and the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state. Correspondingly, after the reach effect has been executed, or without the reach effect being executed, the fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined reach-miss combination may be stopped and displayed. The variable display result of such a decorative pattern is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach loss”) when the variable display result is “miss”.

As a fixed special symbol in the special symbol game, if the normal jackpot symbol such as the special symbol indicating the number “3” is stopped and displayed among the special symbols that are normally open round jackpot symbols, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is In response to reaching the reach state, after a predetermined reach effect is executed, or without reaching effect, a predetermined normal jackpot combination among a plurality of types of jackpot combinations (“indeterminate variation jackpot combination (Also referred to as “”) is fixedly displayed. The fixed decorative pattern which is usually a combination of big hits is, for example, the symbol number variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R in the image display device "1". ~ Of the decorative patterns of "8", any one of the decorative patterns having the even number "2", "4", "6", "8" is "left", "middle", "right" It suffices as long as it can be displayed in a stopped manner evenly on a predetermined effective line in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R. Ordinary symbols having the symbol numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8” that make up the normal jackpot combination are called normal symbols (also referred to as “uncertain variation symbols”).

Corresponding to the fact that the fixed special symbol in the special drawing game becomes the normal big hit symbol, after the predetermined reach effect is executed or the reach effect is not executed, the fixed decorative symbol of the normal big hit combination is stopped and displayed. The variable display mode of the decorative pattern is called a variable display mode (also called “big hit type”) of “indeterminate change” (also called “normal big hit”) when the variable display result is “big hit”. Based on the fact that the variable display result is "big hit" in the "non-probable change" big hit type, the normal open big hit state is controlled, and after the end, the time reduction control (time saving control) is performed. By performing the time saving control, the variable display time (special figure variation time) of the special symbol in the special figure game is shortened as compared with the normal state. The normal state is a normal game state different from a specific game state such as a big hit game state, and an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, initialization processing after turning on the power). The same control as in the state (1) is executed. In the time saving control, one of a condition that a special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) after the jackpot gaming state is ended and that a variable display result is “big hit” is established first. Sometimes you just have to quit.

As a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, if the probability variation big hit symbol such as the special symbol indicating the number "7" is stopped and displayed among the special symbols that are normally open round jackpot symbols, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is Corresponding to the reach state, after the reach effect similar to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "normal" is executed, or the reach effect is not executed, a combination of a plurality of jackpots Among them, the fixed decorative pattern which is a predetermined probability variation big hit combination may be stopped and displayed. The fixed decorative design which is a combination of the probability variation big hits, for example, the design number variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, 5R in the image display device 5 is "1". ~ Of the decorative patterns of "8", any one of the decorative patterns having the odd number "1", "3", "5", "7" is "left", "middle", "right" It suffices that the display is stopped and displayed in line on a predetermined effective line in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. Decorative symbols having odd numbers "1", "3", "5", and "7" that constitute the probability variation big hit combination are referred to as probability variation symbols. When the probability variation big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol in the special drawing game, the fixed decorative symbol which is usually the big hit combination may be stopped and displayed as the variable display result of the decorative symbol.

Regardless of whether the fixed decorative design is a normal big hit combination or a probability variation big hit combination, the variable display mode in which the probability variation big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol in the special drawing game is a "big hit". In this case, it is referred to as a variable display mode of "probability change" (also referred to as "big hit type"). Based on the fact that the variable display result is "big hit" in the "probable change" big hit type, the normal open big hit state is controlled, and after that, stochastic variation control (probability change control) is performed together with time saving control. By performing the probability variation control, the probability that the variable display result (special figure display result) is a "big hit" in each special figure game is improved to be higher than in the normal state. The probability variation control may be finished when the condition that the variable display result becomes "big hit" and the big hit game state is controlled again after the big hit game state ends. Note that, like the time saving control, the probability variation control may be ended when the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) after the end of the big hit game state. In addition, even if the probability variation control is finished when the "probability variation falling" decision is made to end the probability variation control in the probability variation falling lottery that is executed each time the special figure game is started after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Good.

When the time saving control is performed, the control for making the variation time of the ordinary symbol in the ordinary figure game by the ordinary symbol display device 20 (the ordinary figure variation time) shorter than that in the normal state, or the variation of the ordinary symbol in each ordinary figure game Control for improving the probability that the display result will be "Public hit" compared to that in the normal state, tilt control of the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball device 6B based on that the variable display result is "Public hit" In order to make it easier for the game ball to pass (enter) through the second start winning port, such as control for making the tilt control time for performing longer than in the normal state and control for increasing the number of tilts than in the normal state By increasing the possibility that the starting condition will be satisfied, control that is advantageous to the player is performed. In this way, the control that makes it easier for the player to enter the game ball into the second start winning port along with the time saving control is advantageous for the player, and is also called high opening control. As the high opening control, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be combined and performed.

By performing the high opening control, the frequency of the second start winning opening being in the expanded opening state is higher than that in the case where the high opening control is not performed. As a result, the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is easily established, and the special figure game can be executed frequently. The time until the variable display result becomes "big hit" is shortened. The period in which the high opening control can be executed is also called a high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period in which the time saving control is performed.

The gaming state in which both the time saving control and the high opening control are performed is also called a time saving state or a high base state. The game state in which both the time saving control and the high opening control are performed is also called a normal state or a low base state. The gaming state in which the probability variation control is performed is also referred to as a probability variation state or a highly accurate state. The gaming state in which the time saving control and the high opening control are performed together with the probability variation control is also referred to as a highly accurate high base state. The probability variation state in which only the probability variation control is performed and the time saving control or the high opening control is not performed is also referred to as a highly accurate low base state. It should be noted that only the gaming state in which the time saving control and the high opening control are performed together with the probability variation control may be referred to as a “probability variation state” in particular, and may be referred to as a time saving probability variation state in order to distinguish it from the highly accurate low base state. On the other hand, the certainty variation state in which only the certainty variation control is performed and neither the time saving control nor the high opening control is performed (the highly accurate low base state) is sometimes referred to as the no-time saving certainty variation state in order to distinguish it from the highly accurate high base state. The time saving state in which the time saving control or the high opening control is performed without performing the probability variation control is also referred to as a low accuracy high base state. The normal state in which neither the probability variation control, the time saving control, nor the high opening control is performed is also referred to as a low accurate low base state. When at least one of time saving control and probability variation control is performed in a game state other than the normal state, the special figure game can be frequently executed, and the probability that the variable display result in each special figure game is a "big hit" As a result of being increased, the player is in an advantageous state. A gaming state that is advantageous to the player and different from the jackpot gaming state is also called a special gaming state (special state).

As a fixed special symbol in the special symbol game, when a short-term open round big hit symbol such as a special symbol indicating the number "5" is stopped and displayed, or a small hit symbol such as a special symbol indicating the number "2" is stopped and displayed. In this case, the variable display state of the decorative design may not reach the reach state, and any one of a combination of a plurality of types of fixed decorative designs predetermined as the opening opportunity may be stopped and displayed. Further, as the fixed special symbol in the special symbol game, when the short-term open round jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, a predetermined reach effect is executed in response to the variable display state of the decorative symbol being in the reach state. After that, the fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined reach combination (the fixed decorative pattern that is a chance eye corresponding to the short open round big hit state) may be stopped and displayed.

Corresponding to the fact that the fixed special symbol in the special figure game becomes a short-term open round big hit symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol in which various fixed decorative symbols are stopped and displayed is when the variable display result is "big hit". It is referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as a "big hit type") of "attack probability" (also referred to as "a sudden hit big hit" or "sudden probability big hit"). Based on the fact that the variable display result is "big hit" in the "hit" big hit type, the short-term open big hit state is controlled, and after the end, the probability variation control may be performed together with the time saving control.

As a fixed special symbol in the special figure game, the small hit symbol such as the special symbol indicating the number "2" is stopped and displayed, and the variable display result is "small hit", and the small hit game state is controlled. After the end, the game state is not changed, and the variable display result is continuously controlled to the state before the small hit. However, if the special drawing game in which the variable display result is “small hit” is executed and the number of executions of the special drawing game in the special game state has reached a predetermined number, after the end of the small hit game state, The special game state may end and the normal state may occur.

When the special winning design that constitutes the opening chance eye is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the decorative design, and the special winning opening is in the open state, the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probable" There are times when it is controlled to a short-term open big hit state based on that, and when it is controlled to a small hit game state based on that the variable display result is "small hit". On the other hand, the reason why the special winning opening is opened after the fixed decorative pattern forming the reach combination is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the decorative pattern is that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probable" Only when it is controlled to the short-term open big hit state based on this. Therefore, the fixed decorative pattern constituting the opening chance eye corresponds to being controlled to both the short-term open big hit state and the small hit game state, while the fixed decorative pattern of the reach combination is the short-term open big hit state. It corresponds to being controlled by.

The re-lottery effect may be executed during the variable display of the decorative design in which the fixed decorative design is a non-probable variation big hit combination or a probability variation big hit combination. In the re-lottery effect, after the decorative symbols which are usually the jackpot combination are temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5, for example, “left” ], "middle", "right" each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R is changed again with the same decorative pattern being aligned, and a decorative pattern (probably variable pattern) that is a combination of certain odds and big hits, and a regular big hit Any of the decorative patterns (normal patterns) to be combined is stopped and displayed as the final decorative pattern (final stop display). Here, when the re-lottery effect is executed when the jackpot type is "non-probable change", as the re-lottery effect, the decorative symbol that is usually the jackpot combination is changed after re-changing the ornamental pattern that is temporarily stopped and displayed. The re-lottery winning selection effect is displayed in which the display is derived. On the other hand, when the re-lottery effect is executed when the type of jackpot is "probable variation", as the re-lottery effect, the definite ornament that becomes a probable variation jackpot combination after re-changing the decorative pattern that has been temporarily stopped is displayed. The re-lottery winning effect for stopping and displaying symbols may be executed, or the re-lottery winning effect may be executed.

After the fixed decorative pattern that is usually a big hit combination is derived and displayed, the next round starts after one of the rounds ends in the big hit game state at the start of the big hit game state or during the round in the big hit game state During the big hit, which is a certainty change notification production of whether or not to control to the certainty change state during the period from the end of the last round in the big hit game state to the start of the next variable display game, etc. Promotion production may be executed. The notification effect similar to the promotion effect during the big hit may be executed during the first variable display game after the end of the big hit game state. The jackpot mid-promotion production that is executed after the final round in the jackpot gaming state is sometimes called "ending promotion production".

In the big hit middle promotion production, even if the fixed decorative pattern is usually a big hit combination, there is a big success promotion promotion that notifies that there is a promotion that the game state is a probable state, and that there is no promotion that is a probable state. There is a promotion failure promotion during a big hit to inform. For example, in the jackpot promotion promotion, the decorative design is variably displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 and either the normal design or the probability variation design is stopped and displayed as the performance display result, or the decorative design is variably displayed. By displaying different effect images, the presence or absence of promotion in a probable change state may be notified so that the player can recognize.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, and a lamp control board 14 as shown in FIG. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 or the like of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, on which various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly intended for a random number setting function used in a special figure game, a function for inputting a signal from a switch or the like arranged at a predetermined position, and a sub-side control board including an effect control board 12 and the like. It has a function of outputting a control command as an example of the command information as a control signal and transmitting it, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like. Moreover, the main board 11 performs lighting/extinguishing control of each LED (for example, segment LED) which comprises the 1st special symbol display device 4A and the 2nd special symbol display device 4B, and the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol. The variable display of a predetermined display symbol such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 and controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting/turning off/coloring of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a control function.

The main board 11 includes, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110 that receives detection signals from various switches for detecting a game ball and transmits the detection signals to the game control microcomputer 100, and the game control microcomputer 100. A solenoid circuit 111 and the like for transmitting solenoid drive signals to the solenoids 81 and 82 are mounted.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board that is independent of the main board 11, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and outputs the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R. And various circuits for controlling the production operation by the electric parts for production such as the game effect lamp 9 are mounted. That is, the effect control board 12 effects all or part of the display operation in the image display device 5 and the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, and all or part of the lighting/extinguishing operation in the game effect lamp 9 and the like. It is provided with a function of determining the control content for causing the electric component for use to execute a predetermined effect operation.

The voice control board 13 is a control board for voice output control that is provided separately from the effect control board 12, and causes the speakers 8L and 8R to output audio based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. A processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is installed. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control that is provided separately from the effect control board 12, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 or the like based on a command or control data from the effect control board 12. A lamp driver circuit for driving is installed.

As shown in FIG. 2, the main board 11 is connected with wirings for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, and the count switch 23. The gate switch 21, the first starting opening switch 22A, the second starting opening switch 22B, and the count switch 23 have any configuration capable of detecting a game ball as a game medium, such as what is called a sensor. Anything you have is acceptable. Further, on the main board 11, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the ordinary symbol display device 20, the first holding display device 25A, the second holding display device 25B, the public figure holding display device 25C. Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as is connected.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used to control the image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control the voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9. It also includes a lamp control command used to control the lighting operation of the decoration LED and the like.

FIG. 3A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of EXT data is "0". Note that the command form shown in FIG. 3A is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals forming the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 3(A), the command 8001H is a first fluctuation start command for designating fluctuation start in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second variation start command for designating variation start in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. It is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern such as a design. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the designated variation pattern.

The command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command for designating a variable display result such as a special design or a decorative design. In the variable display result notification command, as shown in FIG. 3B, for example, a determination result (preliminary determination result) whether the variable display result is “miss” or “big hit” and the variable display result is “big hit”. ”, different EXT data is set in accordance with the determination result (the jackpot type determination result) of which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is to be set. More specifically, the command 8C00H is a first variable display result notification command indicating a pre-determined result that the variable display result is “miss”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result notification command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “indeterminate change” and the big hit type decided result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result notification command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “probable change” and the big hit type decided result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result notification command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “probable” and the big hit type decided result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result notification command indicating a pre-determined result that the variable display result is “small hit”.

The command 8F00H is a symbol determination command for designating the variable stop (determination) of the decorative symbol in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designating command corresponding to the game state (low accurate low base state, normal state) in which neither the time saving control nor the probability variation control is performed, and the command 9501H performs the time saving control. On the other hand, the second gaming state designation command corresponding to the gaming state (low certainty high base state, time saving state) in which the probability variation control is not performed. Further, the command 9502H is the third gaming state designating command corresponding to the gaming state (high-precision low base state, no time saving certain variation state) in which the time variation control is performed while the time reduction control is not performed, and the command 9503H is the time variation control and the certain variation. It is a fourth game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high-probability high-base state, time-shortening probability variation state) in which control is performed together.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") that designates display of an effect image showing the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A1XXH is a special winning opening open notification command for notifying that the special winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the special winning opening, which notifies that it is a period during which the special winning opening is changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, for example, the same EXT data as that of the variable display result notification command is set, so that different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the big hit type determination result. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the big hit type determination result and the EXT data to be set may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. .. In the special winning opening opening notification command and the big winning opening opening notification command, for example, different EXT data corresponding to the number of times the round has been executed (for example, “1” to “15”) in the normal opening jackpot state or the short-term jackpot opening state. Is set.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. , Is a first start opening winning a prize designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special drawing game using the first special drawing in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is that a game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. Based on the second special symbol display device 4B, the second start opening winning award designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure is established.

The command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number in order to display the special figure reserved storage number in the starting winning memory display area 5H or the like so as to be specified. The command C2XXH is a second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved storage number in order to display the special figure reserved storage number such that it can be specified in the starting winning prize storage display area 5H or the like. The first reserved memory number notification command is, for example, when the first starting opening winning award designating command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. When the second starting mouth winning designation command is transmitted, for example, the second reserved memory number notification command is transmitted based on that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In addition, the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command correspond to that the execution of the special figure game is started when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied. It may be transmitted after being transmitted.

The first reserved memory number notification command is transmitted as a notification of an increase in the first special figure reserved memory number when the first starting condition is satisfied due to the occurrence of the first starting prize. In addition, the second reserved memory number notification command is transmitted as a notification of an increase in the second special figure reserved memory number when the second starting condition is satisfied due to the occurrence of the second starting prize.

In this embodiment, as the stored information, the first start winning combination designation command and the second starting winning combination designation command for designating which of the first starting winning combination and the second starting winning combination the start winning is transmitted. At the same time, the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command that specify the first special figure reserved storage number and the second special figure reserved storage number are transmitted. It should be noted that when the number of reserved storages increases, the number of reserved storages addition designation command (first reserved storage count addition designation command or second designation (Reserved storage number addition designation command), while the number of reserved storages decreases, the number of reserved storages subtraction designation command (first A 1-hold storage count subtraction designation command or a second reserve storage count subtraction designation command) may be transmitted.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command or the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, the total pending storage number notification command for notifying the increase (or decrease) of the total pending storage number may be used.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning time determination result designating command) indicating the contents of the winning time determination result. Among them, the command C4XXH is a symbol designating command indicating whether or not the variable display result is "big hit" or "small hit" as the result of the winning determination, and whether or not the big hit type is determined. Further, the command C6XXH is a variation category command indicating the determination result (variation pattern type determination result) of the determination value range of the variation pattern type determination random number MR3 as the winning determination result.

In this embodiment, in the random number determination process at the time of winning (see FIG. 14), whether or not the variable display result is determined to be "big hit" or "small hit" is determined based on the occurrence of the start winning. Whether or not, the determination value range of the random number MR3 for determining the type of big hit and the variation pattern type is determined. Then, in the EXT data of the symbol designating command, a value that designates that the variable display result is determined as "big hit" or "small hit" or a value that designates the big hit type is set, and for the effect control board 12. Control to send. In addition, the EXT data of the variation category command is set to a value that specifies the range of the determination value that includes the random number value MR3 as the determination result, and control is performed to transmit it to the production control board 12. The effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 determines whether or not the variable display result is determined to be "big hit" or "small hit", based on the value set in the symbol designating command. In addition to being recognizable, the variation pattern type can be recognized based on the value set in the variation category command when the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is included in the determined value within the predetermined range.

As an example of the symbol designating command, the command C400H is the first symbol designating command according to the case where the variable display result is "miss", and the command C401H is the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probable change". According to the second symbol designating command, the command C402H is a variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "non-probable change" is the third symbol designating command, and the command C403H is a variable display result "big hit". "Is a fourth symbol designating command corresponding to the case where the big hit type is "probable", and the command C404H is a fifth symbol designating command corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit". The EXT data set in the symbol designating command and the EXT data set in the variable display result notification command may be shared.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a game control program to perform a control operation, and a numerical data that indicates a random number value independently of the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104 for performing and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 are provided.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 to execute a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101 to read fixed data, the CPU 103 writes variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores the data, and the CPU 103 writes various variable data to the RAM 102. A variable data read operation for reading out, a receiving operation in which the CPU 103 receives an input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I/O 105, and a CPU 103 to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I/O 105. The transmission operation of outputting various signals is also performed.

FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random number values counted on the main substrate 11 side. As shown in FIG. 4, in this embodiment, on the side of the main substrate 11, a random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, a random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, Numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR4 for determining the fluctuation pattern and the random number value MR5 for determining the universal figure display result are controlled to be countable. A random number value other than these may be used to enhance the game effect. The random number used to control the progress of such a game is also called a game random number.

The random number circuit 104 may be any one that counts numerical data indicating a part or all of these random number values MR1 to MR5. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating a part of MR5 may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result determines whether or not the variable display result such as a special symbol in the special figure game is controlled as a "big hit" to the big hit gaming state, and the variable display result is a "small hit" and the small hit. It is a random number value used to determine whether to control the gaming state, and takes a value in the range of "1" to "65535", for example. The random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines the jackpot type, which is the variable display mode of the decorative pattern when the variable display result is "big hit", to any one of "non-probable variation", "probable variation", and "probability". It is a random number value used for this purpose, and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is a random number value used for determining the variation pattern type in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to any of a plurality of types prepared in advance, for example, "1". Takes a value in the range of "251". The random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to any one of a plurality of types prepared in advance, for example, "1" to "". It takes a value in the range of "997". The random number MR5 for determining the figure display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the figure game by the ordinary symbol display device 20 is "per figure" or "missing figure". It is a random number value that is set, and takes a value in the range of, for example, “3” to “13”.

FIG. 5 shows a variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is “miss”, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is “non-reach” and “reach”, respectively, and the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance, corresponding to the case where the display result is a "big hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern") and is variable. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the display result is “miss” and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is “reach” is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as “reach loss variation pattern”). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is referred to as a big hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a reach effect of normal reach is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a reach effect of super reach such as super reach α or super reach β is executed. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" is referred to as a small hit variation pattern. The big hit variation pattern and the small hit variation pattern are included in the hit variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" or "small hit".

Each variation pattern shown in FIG. 5 may be included in at least one variation pattern type among a plurality of predetermined variation pattern types. Each variation pattern type may be configured to include, for example, a single or a plurality of variation patterns that are classified (grouped) based on the mode of the effect operation performed during the variable display of the decorative pattern.

As an example, a plurality of variation patterns are classified (grouped) according to the type (reproduction mode) of reach production, and the variation pattern type that includes the variation pattern in which the variable display state of the decorative pattern does not reach the reach and the variation with normal reach It may be divided into a variation pattern type including a pattern and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern accompanied by super reach (super reach α or super reach β). Further, the variation patterns involving super reach may be classified into different variation pattern types according to the content of the reach effect (for example, whether it is super reach α or super reach β). Alternatively, it may be classified into different variation pattern types depending on whether or not a predetermined variable display effect is executed. As another example, a plurality of fluctuation patterns may be classified (grouped) according to the variable display time of the decorative pattern. Some of the plurality of fluctuation pattern types may be configured to include a common fluctuation pattern.

In the ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2, in addition to the game control program, various selection data used for controlling the progress of the game, table data, etc. are stored. .. For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, etc. prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, in the ROM 101, table data forming a plurality of command tables used by the CPU 103 to transmit control signals as various control commands from the main board 11 and a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns as shown in FIG. 5 are stored. The table data and the like forming the fluctuation pattern table are stored.

FIG. 6 shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this embodiment, a first special figure display result decision table 130A shown in FIG. 6A and a second special figure display result decision table 130B shown in FIG. 6B are provided as special figure display result decision tables. , Prepared in advance. The first special symbol display result determination table 130A, the variable display result before the fixed special symbol which is the variable display result in the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is derived and displayed. Based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, whether or not to control the big hit game state as "big hit" and whether to control the variable display result as "small hit" to the small hit game state It is a table that is referenced to determine. The second special symbol display result determination table 130B, the variable display result before the fixed special symbol which is the variable display result in the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is derived and displayed. Based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, whether or not to control the big hit game state as "big hit" and whether to control the variable display result as "small hit" to the small hit game state It is a table that is referenced to determine.

In the first special figure display result determination table 130A, the special figure is displayed depending on whether the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the time saving state (low certainty state), or the certainty changed state (high certainty state). A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for result determination is assigned to the special figure display results of "big hit", "small hit", and "miss". In the second special figure display result determination table 130B, a disturbance for determining the special figure display result is determined depending on whether the game state is the normal state, the time saving state (low certainty state), or the certainty variation state (high certainty state). A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the numerical value MR1 is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "miss".

In the first special figure display result determination table 130A and the second special figure display result determination table 130B, the table data showing the decision value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a "big hit". "Is the determination data assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state. In each of the first special figure display result determination table 130A and the second special figure display result determination table 130B, when the game state is the probability changing state (high accuracy state), it is the normal state or the time saving state (low accuracy state). More decision values are assigned to the special jackpot display result of "big hit" than when. Thereby, in the probability variation state (high accuracy state) in which the probability variation control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, as compared to the normal state or the time saving state (low accuracy state), the special figure display result is set as “big hit” and the big hit game The probability of being determined to control the state increases. That is, in each of the first special figure display result determination table 130A and the second special figure display result determination table 130B, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the probable variation state, compared to the normal state and the time saving state. The determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that the probability of being determined to control the jackpot gaming state is high.

In the setting example of the first special figure display result determination table 130A, a predetermined range of determination values (values in the range of "30000" to "30350") are assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit". On the other hand, in the setting example of the second special figure display result determination table 130B, the determined value is not assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit". With such a setting, when the variable display result is determined based on the satisfaction of the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A, When the variable display result is determined based on the fact that the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied, the special figure display result is displayed. The proportion determined to be controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" can be made different.

In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, it is not decided to control the special figure display result as "small hit" to the small hit game state, so that, for example, a time saving state (low accurate high base state) or a certain variation In the gaming state in which the game ball easily enters the second start winning hole formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B, such as the state (high-precision high-base state), frequent occurrence of the small hitting game state in which it is difficult to obtain the winning ball By avoiding this, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game due to the extension of the game. In the second special figure display result determination table 130B as well, a determination value in a predetermined range different from the setting in the first special figure display result determination table 130A is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit". Good. For example, in the second special figure display result determination table 130B, a smaller determination value than that in the first special figure display result determination table 130A may be assigned to the special figure display result of “small hit”. In this way, when the high base state such as the time saving state or the probability changing state, the proportion determined to be controlled to the small hitting gaming state becomes lower than when the low base state such as the normal state or the probability changing state without time saving is set. Good. Alternatively, regardless of which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied, the special figure display result determination table may be referenced to determine the special figure display result.

FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table 131 stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table 131 determines the jackpot type to any of a plurality of types based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined to control the jackpot gaming state with the special map display result being "jack". Is a table that is referred to for. In the jackpot type determination table 131, the special symbol variably displayed (changed) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (second symbol). The numerical value (decision value) that is compared with the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type depending on whether it is a special figure game by the special symbol display device 4B) is a plurality such as "non-probability variation", "probability variation", "probability". It is assigned to the jackpot type.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table 131, the assignment of the determination value to the jackpot type of “probability” differs depending on whether the variation special map is the first special diagram or the second special diagram. That is, when the fluctuation special map is the first special map, the determined value of the predetermined range (the value in the range of “83” to “100”) is assigned to the jackpot type of “probability”, while the fluctuation special map is Is the second special map, the determined value is not assigned to the jackpot type of “probability”. With such settings, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. And when the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied With, it is possible to make different the ratio of determining the jackpot type “probably”. Particularly, in the special drawing game using the second special drawing, since it is not decided that the big hit type is set to "probability" and the short hit open big hit state is controlled, for example, by the high open control accompanying the time saving control, the normal variable winning ball device In a game state where the game ball easily enters the second starting winning opening formed by 6B, it is possible to avoid frequent occurrence of short-term open big hit state in which it is difficult to obtain the prize ball, and to prevent a decrease in game enjoyment due to delay in the game. .

Even when the variation special map is the second special figure, a determined value in a predetermined range different from that when the variation special figure is the first special figure may be assigned to the jackpot type of “probability”. Good. For example, when the variation special map is the second special figure, a smaller determination value than that in the case where the variation special figure is the first special figure may be assigned to the jackpot type “probability”. Alternatively, regardless of whether the variation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data.

Further, in the ROM 101, in order to determine the variation pattern to any one of a plurality of types based on the special figure display result, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, and the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern. A fluctuation pattern determination table to be referred to is stored.

The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 may be a backup RAM that is partially or wholly backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied with power). It In particular, at least data according to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as a special figure process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like. Further, data according to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

Such a RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 150 as shown in FIG. 8, for example, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of a game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. There is. The game control data holding area 150 shown in FIG. 8 is a first special figure reservation storage section 151A, a second special figure reservation storage section 151B, a general figure reservation storage section 151C, a game control flag setting section 152, and a game. The control timer setting unit 153, the game control counter setting unit 154, and the game control buffer setting unit 155 are provided.

Although the game ball has passed through (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A, the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A has not yet started, although the starting winning (first starting winning) has occurred. The pending data of the special figure game (special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A associates the winning number (game ball detection order) into the first start winning opening with the reservation number, and sets the first start condition for the passage (entry) of the game ball. The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, etc., which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 based on the establishment, are suspended. The data is stored until the number of storage reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The pending data thus stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A indicates that execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game is displayed. Based on the (result), it becomes the holding information that enables it to be determined whether or not a predetermined game value is given.

Although the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated, the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B is still started. The pending data of the non-special figure game (special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second start winning opening with the reservation number, and sets the second start condition for the passage (entry) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, etc., which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 based on the establishment, are withheld. It is stored as data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The pending data thus stored in the second special figure holding storage unit 151B indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game is displayed. Based on the (result), it becomes the holding information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a predetermined game value is given.

In addition, with the game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening, the holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the passing (entering) of the gaming ball. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning due to this may be stored in the common hold storage unit in association with the hold number. In this case, starting port data indicating which of the first starting winning port and the second starting winning port the game ball has passed (entered) is included in the holding information and may be stored in association with the holding number. ..

The general figure reservation storage unit 151C stores the reservation information of the general figure game which is not yet started by the normal symbol display 20, although the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the public figure reservation storage unit 151C is associated with the reservation numbers in the order in which the game balls have passed through the passage gate 41, and based on the passage of the game balls, the CPU 103 extracts the general figure display result from the random number circuit 104 or the like. Numerical data or the like indicating the random number MR5 for use as reserved data is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating a timer value for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count value used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 154 may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count some or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update them by software.

For example, in the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154, numerical data indicating the random number values MR2 to MR5 is stored as a random count value, and each random number is regularly or irregularly depending on the execution of the software by the CPU 103. The numerical data indicating the numerical value is updated. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing a predetermined process such as a scramble process or a calculation process on all or part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating a buffer value in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The I/O 105 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 is an input port for capturing various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100, and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. And an output port for transmission.

As shown in FIG. 2, the production control board 12 is provided with a production control CPU 120 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores a production control program and fixed data, and a work area for the production control CPU 120. RAM 122, a display control unit 123 that executes a process for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, and a random number that updates numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the effect control CPU 120. A circuit 124 and an I/O 125 are mounted.

As an example, in the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control program read from the ROM 121, whereby processing for controlling effect operation by the effect electric components is executed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads out fixed data from the ROM 121 by a fixed data read operation, the effect control CPU 120 writes various variable data in the RAM 122 and temporarily stores the variable data, and the effect control CPU 120 writes in the RAM 122. A variation data read operation for reading various temporarily stored variation data, a reception operation in which the production control CPU 120 receives an input of various signals from the outside of the production control board 12 via the I/O 125, and the production control CPU 120 performs I/O. A transmission operation of outputting various signals to the outside of the production control board 12 via O125 is also performed.

The effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12.

Wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 5, wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the sound control substrate 13, in the production control board 12. To the lamp control board 14, wirings for transmitting an illumination signal as an information signal indicating lamp data are connected. Furthermore, on the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the operation action of the player for the stick controller 31A is detected from the controller sensor unit 35A, and a game for the push button 31B. A wiring for transmitting an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that an operation action of a person is detected from the push sensor 35B is also connected.

In the effect control board 12, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the like counts the numerical data indicating various random number values used for controlling the effect operation in an updatable manner. The random number used to control such a rendering operation is also referred to as a rendering random number.

In the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2, various data tables used for controlling the effect operation are stored in addition to the effect control program. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data forming a plurality of determination tables and determination tables prepared for the production control CPU 120 to make various determinations, determinations, and settings, pattern data forming various production control patterns, and the like. Remembered

As an example, in the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect operation by various effect devices (for example, the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, the effect model, etc.). An effect control pattern table storing a plurality of effect control patterns to be used is stored. The effect control pattern is made up of data or the like indicating the control content corresponding to various effect operations executed according to the progress status of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the effect control pattern table, for example, a special figure change time effect control pattern, a notice effect control pattern, and various effect control patterns may be stored.

The special figure variation time production control pattern corresponds to a plurality of types of variation patterns, in the period from the start of variation of the special symbol in the special figure game to the derivation display of the fixed special symbol which is the special figure display result. , Data display showing the control contents of various production operations, such as variable display operation of decorative designs, reach production, production display operation in re-lottery production, and various production display operations without variable display of decorative designs. Has been done. The advance notice effect control pattern is composed of data or the like indicating the control content of the effect operation that is the advance notice effect executed corresponding to the advance notice pattern prepared in advance. Various effect control patterns correspond to various effect operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and are composed of data indicating the control contents thereof.

The special figure variation time production control pattern may include, for example, a plurality of types of reach production control patterns in which the production mode in each reach production is different for each variation pattern for executing the reach production.

FIG. 9A shows a configuration example of the effect control pattern. Each effect control pattern, such as special figure variation time effect control pattern and various effect control patterns, for example, effect control process timer judgment value, display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, end code, etc. It may be configured from control data for controlling various effect operations, and the content of various effect controls, effect control switching timing, and the like may be set in time series. In addition, the effect control pattern may include, for example, movable member control data that specifies the content of operation control of a movable member provided inside or outside the game area. The effect control process timer determination value is a value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the effect control process timer (effect control process timer value) provided in a predetermined area of the effect control RAM built in the effect control microcomputer 120. ), the determination value corresponding to the execution time (effect time) of each effect operation is set in advance. Instead of the effect control process timer determination value, for example, a predetermined effect control command is received from the main board 11, and a predetermined process is executed as a process for controlling the effect operation in the effect control microcomputer 120. Data indicating switching timing of effect control may be set in correspondence with predetermined control content or processing content such as that.

The display control data includes data indicating the display mode of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, such as data indicating the variation mode of each decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern. That is, the display control data is data that specifies the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5. The voice control data includes, for example, data indicating a voice output mode from the speakers 8L and 8R, such as data indicating an output mode of a sound effect associated with the variable display operation of the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern. There is. That is, the voice control data is data that specifies the voice output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R. The lamp control data includes data indicating the lighting operation mode of the light-emitting body such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED. That is, the lamp control data is data that specifies the lighting operation of the light emitter. The operation detection control data includes, for example, data indicating a period during which an operation on the operation unit such as the operation button 30 is effectively detected, the control content of the effect operation when the operation is effectively detected, and the like. That is, the operation detection control data is data that specifies the effect operation according to the operation on the operation unit. It should be noted that these control data need not be included in all the effect control patterns, and an effect control pattern configured to include some control data according to the content of the effect operation by each effect control pattern. There may be.

FIG. 9B is a diagram for explaining various effect operations executed according to the content of the effect control pattern. The effect control CPU 120 determines the control content of the effect operation according to various control data included in the effect control pattern. For example, when the effect control process timer value matches any of the effect control process timer determination values, the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode specified by the display control data associated with the effect control process timer determination value, and the character is displayed. Control is performed to display an effect image such as an image or a background image on the screen of the image display device 5. In addition, control is performed to output sound from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner specified by the voice control data, and control is performed to blink the light emitting bodies such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED in a manner specified by the lamp control data. Then, during the operation valid period designated by the operation detection control data, the operation for the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B is accepted to control the effect contents. It should be noted that dummy data (data that does not specify control) may be set in the data corresponding to the effect parts that are not controlled even though they correspond to the effect control process timer determination value.

The effect operation shown in FIG. 9(B) corresponds to the entire period from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern to the final stop, but the present invention is not limited to this, and during the variable display of the decorative pattern. An effect control pattern for executing the effect operation may be provided corresponding to a part of the period (for example, the period for performing the notice effect). Alternatively, in order to execute the production operation corresponding to a predetermined period other than the variable display of the decorative pattern (for example, a period during which a round is being executed in the big hit game state, a period in which an ending effect is executed at the end of the big hit game state) Effect control pattern may be provided.

The effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern (special figure change effect control pattern) based on the change pattern indicated by the change pattern designating command, for example, when starting variable display of the decorative pattern. Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a corresponding effect control pattern (notice effect control pattern), for example, when starting the execution of the effect effect. Here, when setting the effect control pattern, the pattern data forming the applicable effect control pattern may be read from the ROM 121 and temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the applicable effect control pattern is configured. The storage address of the pattern data in the ROM 121 may be temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 and the read position of the storage data in the ROM 121 may be designated. After that, each time the performance control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the performance control process timer determination values, and if it matches, the performance operation according to various corresponding control data. Control. In this way, the effect control CPU 120, according to the contents of the process data #1 to process data #n (n is an arbitrary integer) included in the effect control pattern, the effect device (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game). The control of the effect lamp 9 and the light emitting body such as the decorative LED, the movable member included in the production model, and the like is advanced. In each process data #1 to process data #n, display control data #1 to display control data #n and voice control data #1 to voice control associated with the effect control process timer determination values #1 to #n. Data #n, lamp control data #1 to lamp control data #n, and operation detection control data #1 to operation detection control data #n show the control contents of the effect operation in the effect device and specify the execution of effect control. Control execution data #1 to effect control execution data #n are configured.

A command according to the effect control pattern thus set is output from the effect control CPU 120 to the display control unit 123, the voice control board 13, and the like. In the display control unit 123 that has received the command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, a predetermined VDP or the like reads out the image data indicated by the command from an image data memory such as a CGROM and temporarily stores it in the VRAM for development. Further, in the voice control board 13 that receives the command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, the voice synthesizing IC reads the voice data indicated by the command from the voice data ROM and temporarily stores it in the voice RAM or the like for development. ..

In the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2, an effect control data holding area 190 as shown in FIG. 10A, for example, is provided as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. Is provided. The production control data holding area 190 shown in FIG. 10A includes a production control flag setting unit 191, a production control timer setting unit 192, a production control counter setting unit 193, and a production control buffer setting unit 194. There is.

The effect control flag setting unit 191 has a plurality of types in which the state can be updated according to the effect operation state such as the effect image display state on the screen of the image display device 5 or the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. Flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations such as the operation of displaying an effect image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 192 stores data indicating a timer value for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The effect control counter setting unit 193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this embodiment, the data forming the start-up winning prize reception command buffer 194A as shown in FIG. 10B is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The start prize-winning reception command buffer 194A is provided with a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "1" to "8") corresponding to the maximum value of the total number of reserved memories (for example, "8"). When there is a starting winning prize in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, a starting opening winning designation command (first starting opening winning designation command or second starting opening winning designation command), a symbol designating command, and a variation category command , And the number of reserved storage notifications (first reserved storage number notification command or second reserved storage number notification command) are set as one and transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A memory area is secured in the start winning award reception command buffer 194A so that these starting mouth winning designation command, symbol designating command, variation category command, and reserved storage number notification command can be stored in association with each other.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the commands in the order received at the time of the start winning from the beginning in the empty area of the start winning time reception command buffer 194A. At the time of starting winning, the command transmission is performed in the order of the starting mouth winning designating command, the symbol designating command, the variable category command, and the reserved storage number notification command. Therefore, if the command reception is normally performed, as shown in FIG. 10B, in the storage area corresponding to each of the buffer numbers “1” to “8”, the starting mouth winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the fluctuation The category command and the pending storage number notification command are stored in this order. In FIG. 10B, the commands are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “6”.

The command stored in the start-up winning prize reception command buffer 194A shown in FIG. 10B is the first storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number "1") every time the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. Is deleted from the one stored in, and the stored contents thereafter are shifted. For example, when the variable display of a new decorative pattern is started in the storage state shown in FIG. 10B, each command stored in the buffer number “1” is deleted and corresponds to the buffer number “2”. Each command stored in the area is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer number “1”, and each command stored in the area corresponding to each of the buffer numbers “3” to “6” is changed to the buffer number. The area is shifted to the area corresponding to "2" to "5".

In the area corresponding to the buffer number “6” of the start winning prize reception command buffer 194A shown in FIG. 10B, an example in which command reception cannot be normally performed and the reserved storage number notification command is dropped is shown. Has been done. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 10(B), the content in the fourth storage area in which the reserved storage number notification command should originally be stored is “0000(H)” corresponding to the buffer number “6”. It remains.

Whether or not the prefetching notice effect is executed based on the command (starting mouth winning designation command, symbol designating command, variation category command and reserved memory number notification command) stored in the starting winning prize reception command buffer 194A Alternatively, the look-ahead notice pattern for execution is determined. At this time, if a missing or inconsistent command occurs at the time of winning the start prize, the pre-reading notice effect is not set until the variable display of the hold information corresponding to the command is executed (digested). Limited to. When a command at the time of starting winning is received during the period when the setting of the pre-reading notice effect is limited (while the pre-reading notice effect is being restricted), it is not possible to respond to the command for which the pre-reading notice effect was not set at the reception timing. The determination information is set to "1" (or ON state). In addition, in the case of limiting the execution of the pre-reading notice production, even if the pre-reading notice production of all aspects is not executed, the pre-reading notice production targeting the variable display corresponding to the start winning that has occurred within the predetermined period may be executed. Alternatively, it is also possible not to execute the prefetching notice effect in some aspects.

In the start winning award reception command buffer 194A shown in FIG. 10B, each buffer number (holding number) is stored in association with a "holding display form" indicating a display form of the hold storage display. When the value of this "holding display mode" is "0", it is a normal display mode, and when it is "1" or "2", it is a special mode different from the normal display mode. For example, when the pre-reading notice effect of the notice display notice is being executed, it is a special mode.

Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described.

In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes predetermined processing which is game control main processing. When the game control main processing is started, the CPU 103 makes necessary initialization after setting interrupt prohibition. In this initial setting, the RAM 101 is cleared, for example. In addition, register setting of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed. As a result, thereafter, the interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt processing. When the initial setting is completed, the interrupt is permitted and then the loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed and then the loop process may be entered.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 11. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 11 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to cause the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. The state of the detection signal input from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S11). Then, by executing a predetermined main side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S12). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information, etc., which are supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, are output (steps). S13).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers such as the random number values MR1 to MR5 used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S14). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S15). In the special symbol process processing, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol. Various processes are selected and executed in order to control the display operation of the display device 4B and the opening/closing operation setting of the special winning opening of the special variable winning ball device 7 in a predetermined procedure.

Following the special symbol process process, a normal symbol process process is executed (step S16). The CPU 103 controls the display operation (for example, turning on and off of the segment LED, etc.) on the ordinary symbol display device 20 by executing the ordinary symbol process processing, and the variable display of the ordinary symbol and the movable variable prize ball device 6B of the ordinary symbol. It enables the setting of tilting motion of winglets.

After executing the normal symbol process process, the CPU 103 executes a command control process to transmit a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 (step S17). As an example, in the command control processing, effect control among the output ports included in the I/O 105 corresponding to the setting in the command transmission table designated by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155. After setting the control data to the output port for transmitting the production control command to the substrate 12, set the predetermined control data to the output port of the production control INT signal to turn on the production control INT signal for the predetermined time. It is possible to transmit the effect control command based on the setting in the command transmission table by turning off from the off state. After executing the command control process, after setting the interrupt enable state, the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S15 shown in FIG. 11 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101). FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step S101 of FIG. 12 as the start winning determination processing.

In the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 13, the CPU 103 first determines the first based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether the starting opening switch 22A is turned on (step S201). At this time, if the first starting opening switch 22A is turned on (step S201; Yes), the number of reserved special memories of the special figure game using the first special figure is a predetermined upper limit value. (For example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) is determined (step S202). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the first special figure reservation storage number by reading the first reservation storage number count value, which is the stored value of the first reservation storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, for example. When the first special figure reservation storage number is not the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; No), for example, the stored value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to "1" ( Step S203).

Normally, when the first starting opening switch 22A is off in step S201 (step S201; No), and when the first special figure reservation storage number has reached the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; Yes). Based on the detection signal from the second starting port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether or not the second starting port switch 22B is on ( Step S204). At this time, if the second starting opening switch 22B is ON (step S204; Yes), the second special figure reservation storage number, which is the reservation storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value. (For example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) is determined (step S205). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the second special figure reservation storage number by reading the second reservation storage number count value, which is the stored value of the second reservation storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, for example. When the second special figure reservation storage number is not the upper limit value in step S205 (step S205; No), for example, the stored value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to "2" ( Step S206).

After performing either of the processes of steps S203 and S206, the special figure reservation storage number corresponding to the starting port buffer value that is the stored value of the starting port buffer is updated so as to be incremented by 1 (step S207). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the first reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the second suspension storage count value is incremented by 1. Thus, the first reserved memory count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition corresponding to the special drawing game using the first special drawing is satisfied. Updated to increase. Further, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition corresponding to the special drawing game using the second special drawing is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total pending storage number is also updated so as to be incremented by 1 (step S208). For example, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, may be updated so as to be incremented by 1.

After executing the process of step S208, the CPU 103 determines the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result or the jackpot type from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 or the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for determining and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type are extracted (step S209). Numerical data indicating each random value thus extracted is stored by being set as reservation information at the head of an empty entry in the special figure reservation storage unit corresponding to the starting opening buffer value (step S210). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are set in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, while when the starting opening buffer value is "2", Numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are set in the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B.

Numerical data showing the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is "big hit" or "small hit", Is used to determine the type of big hit when the variable display result is "big hit". The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is used to determine the variation pattern type to which the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol belongs. By executing the processing of step S209, the CPU 103 displays numerical data indicating a part or all of the random number values used to determine the variable display mode including the variable display result of the special symbol and the decorative symbol and the variable display time. Extract.

Subsequent to the processing of step S210, the transmission setting of the starting mouth winning designation command according to the starting mouth buffer value is performed (step S211). For example, when the starting mouth buffer value is “1”, the storage address of the first starting mouth winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. The setting for transmitting the first starting opening winning award designation command to 12 is performed. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is “2”, by storing the storage address of the second starting opening winning award designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, the effect control board 12 is notified. The setting for transmitting the second start opening winning award designation command is performed. The start mouth winning designation command thus set is, for example, after the special symbol process processing is completed, the command control processing of step S17 shown in FIG. 11 is executed, and the like, from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Is transmitted.

Following the process of step S211, a winning random number determination process is executed (step S212). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the reservation storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the reservation storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12. Settings are performed (step S213). The reservation storage number notification command set in this way is, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed, the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. Is transmitted.

After executing the processing of step S213, it is determined whether the starting opening buffer value is "1" or "2" (step S214). At this time, if the starting opening buffer value is "1" (step S214; "1"), the starting opening buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (step S215), and then step S204. Proceed to processing. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2" (step S214; "2"), the starting opening buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (step S216). The start winning determination process ends. As a result, even when both the first starting opening switch 22A and the second starting opening switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid starting winning of a game ball, the processing based on the detection of both effective starting winnings can be surely completed.

FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S212 of FIG. 13 as the winning random number determination process. In this embodiment, when the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started, the special symbol normal process is performed to set the special symbol display result (variable display result of the special symbol) as "big hit" or "small hit". A decision is made as to whether to control the state or the small hitting gaming state. Further, in the variation pattern setting processing, determination of variation pattern types that abstractly classify variable display modes of decorative designs, determination of variation patterns that specifically define variable display modes of decorative designs, and the like are performed. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, the CPU 103 executes the prize random number determination process of step S212 at the timing when the game ball is detected at the start winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening). As a result, it is determined whether or not the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is the random number value MR1 that is determined to be displayed as the special symbol display result, and whether the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the predetermined display mode with super reach. Whether or not it is determined. As a result, before the variable display of the special symbol or decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting winning opening is started, the special symbol display result becomes "big hit" or "small hit", It is pre-read that the variable display mode of the symbol will be the predetermined display mode, and based on this pre-read result, whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice effect is performed by the effect control CPU 120 or the like on the effect control board 12 side. be able to.

In the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 14, the CPU 103 first checks the current state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by, for example, confirming the states of the time saving flag and the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 and the like. The gaming state is specified (step S401). The CPU 103 identifies the probability variation state when the probability variation flag is on, identifies the time variation state when the probability variation flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are off. Sometimes it is necessary to specify that it is in a normal state.

Following the processing of step S401, the starting mouth buffer value (“1” or “2”) and the current data are displayed from the table data forming the first special figure display result determination table 130A or the second special figure display result determination table 130B. The special figure display result determination table data used for determining the special figure display result is selected corresponding to the gaming state (step S402). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step S209 of FIG. 13 is within the predetermined jackpot determination range (step S403). In the jackpot determination range, individual determination values assigned to the special jackpot display result of "big hit" in the special figure display result determination table data selected in the process of step S402 are set, and the CPU 103 sets the random number value MR1 and each value. It suffices to be able to determine the presence or absence of a decision value that matches the random number value MR1 by comparing the decision values one by one. Alternatively, a numerical value indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the determination values included in the big hit determination range is set, and the CPU 103 sets the random number MR1 and the minimum or maximum value of the big hit determination range. It suffices to be able to determine whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range by comparison. At this time, by determining that the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it is determined that the variable display result based on the pending data including the random number value MR1 is determined to be a “jackpot” (jump jack start determination). it can.

When it is determined in step S403 that it is not within the big hit determination range (step S403; No), it is determined whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 is within the predetermined small hit determination range (step S403). S404). The CPU 103 executes the same process as in the case of the big hit determination range for the decision value assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit" in the special figure display result determination table data selected in the process of step S402. Therefore, it is sufficient to determine whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the small hit determination range. When it is determined in step S404 that it is not within the small hit determination range (step S404; No), a symbol designating command corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “miss” is given to the effect control board 12. Settings for transmission are made (step S405). As an example, the CPU 103 may set a command table or the like for setting the EXT data in the symbol designating command to “00H”.

Following the processing of step S405, the variation pattern type determination threshold for loss is set according to the presence or absence of time saving control in the current gaming state specified by the processing of step S401 (step S406). The fluctuation pattern type determination threshold value specifies the range of the determination value that includes the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern type, and is determined as one of a plurality of types of fluctuation categories that are preset according to the fluctuation pattern type or the like. It becomes a judgment value set for judging whether or not there is. In this embodiment, when at least the variable display result is “miss”, the variable category (“non-reach” is commonly used regardless of the presence/absence of time saving control and the total number of pending memories) is the variable display mode (“non-reach”). “Common” variation category), variation categories that are commonly displayed as “Super Reach” variable display modes regardless of the presence/absence of time saving control and the total number of pending storages (“Super Reach Common” variation category), and “Other” The variation category of “” (variation category of “other loss”) is provided. Then, it suffices to be able to determine whether or not such a variation category is determined based on the random number value MR3.

When it is determined in step S404 that it is within the small hit determination range (step S404; Yes), a symbol designating command corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “small hit” is given to the effect control board 12. Settings are made for transmission (step S407). As an example, the CPU 103 may set a command table or the like for setting the EXT data in the symbol designating command to “04H”. Following the processing of step S407, a variation pattern type determination threshold for small hits is set (step S408). For example, in the process of step S408, "251" is set as the variation pattern type determination threshold for small hits. Here, "251" is the maximum value in the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, and the random number value MR3 is always a value equal to or smaller than the variation pattern type determination threshold for small hits. That is, it is determined that only one variation category is provided according to the case where the variable display result is “small hit”, and the variation category is determined.

When it is determined in step S403 that the jackpot is within the jackpot determination range (step S403; Yes), the jackpot type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type (step S409). At this time, the CPU 103 responds to the variation special map (“first special map” corresponding to “1” or “second special map” corresponding to “2”) specified in correspondence with the starting opening buffer value. From the table data forming the jackpot type determination table 131, the jackpot type determination table data is selected. Then, by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data, it is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined. The setting for transmitting the symbol designating command according to the determination result by the process of step S409 to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S410). As an example, when it is determined that the jackpot type is determined to be “probable variation” in step S409, the EXT data in the symbol designating command is set to “01H”, and it is determined that the jackpot type is determined to be “indeterminate variation”. The EXT data in the symbol designation command is set to "02H", and when it is determined that the jackpot type is determined to be "probability", a command table or the like for setting the EXT data in the symbol designation command to "03H" can be set. Good. Following the process of step S410, a variation pattern type determination threshold value is set according to the determination result of the process of step S409 (step S411).

After performing any of the processes of steps S406, S408, and S411, using the variation pattern type determination threshold value set in each process and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, The variation category corresponding to the range of the determined value including the random number MR3 is determined (step S412).

By the processing of steps S406, S408, and S411, instead of setting a predetermined variation pattern type determination threshold value, one of the variation pattern type determination tables is set, and any variation pattern type as a variation category. You may make it determine whether it is determined by. After that, after setting the variable category command according to the determination result by the process of step S412 to be transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step S413), the winning random number determination process is ended.

In the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 14, even when the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”, the variation category uniformly includes the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type. Is decided. On the other hand, when the variable display result is determined to be “big hit” or “small hit”, the variation category may not be determined. In this case, the variable display result is "big hit" or "small hit" and a pattern designating command is transmitted according to the variable display result, which is the "big hit" or "small hit" variation pattern type. You may make it transmit the variable category command which shows that comprehensively.

In the starting winning determination process shown in FIG. 13 and the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 14, after the process of step S211 in FIG. 13, the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 14 is performed in step S212. By doing so, the processing of steps S405, S407, S410, and S413 in FIG. 14 is executed, and further the processing of step S214 in FIG. 13 is executed. After these processes are executed, by executing the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. 11, the game ball passes through (enters) the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening, and the first starting condition. And when the second starting condition is satisfied, the starting mouth winning designation command (the first starting mouth winning designation command or the second starting mouth winning designation command), the symbol designating command, the variation category command, the storage number notification command (first holding) Four commands, a storage number notification command or a second reserved storage number notification command), are collectively transmitted within one timer interrupt as one set. Note that the commands are not limited to being collectively transmitted within one timer interrupt, and commands may be sequentially transmitted one by one by the command control processing of step S17 for each timer interrupt.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101 of FIG. 12, the CPU 103 selects one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. Then run.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0". In this special symbol normal processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol based on the presence or absence of the pending data stored in the first special symbol reservation storage unit 151A and the second special symbol reservation storage unit 151B. It is determined whether or not the special drawing game is started by the display device 4B. In the special symbol normal process, whether or not to make the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol “big hit” or “small hit” based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, It is decided (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal process, in response to the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game, the special symbol decision in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B (big hit symbol or Either a small hit pattern or a lost pattern) is set. In the special symbol normal process, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" when the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is predetermined. In this embodiment, the special figure game using the second special figure is executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). ). Therefore, in the special symbol normal process, when the execution conditions of the special figure game using the first special figure, and the execution conditions of the special figure game using the second special figure are satisfied (first special figure pending storage In the case where the hold data is stored in the section 151A and the second special figure reservation storage section 151B), the control for preferentially establishing the start condition of the special figure game using the second special figure is executed. On the other hand, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be established in the winning order. Say).

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, variation is performed using numerical data indicating a random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, based on a result of predetermination of whether or not the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. A process of deciding a pattern type into any of a plurality of types, or a process of deciding a variation pattern into any of a plurality of types by using numerical data indicating a random number value MR4 for fluctuating pattern determination, based on the result of determination of the variation pattern type. Etc. are included. When the variation pattern setting process is executed and the variable display of the special symbol is started, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "2".

By the special symbol normal process of step S110 and the variation pattern setting process of step S111, the variation pattern including the variable display time of the fixed special symbol or the special symbol and the decorative symbol which is the variable display result of the special symbol is determined. That is, the special symbol normal process and the variation pattern setting process include a random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, a random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, a random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, and a random number value for determining the variation pattern. Using MR4, it includes a process of determining a variable display mode of a special symbol or a decorative symbol.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". In this special symbol variation process, the setting process for changing the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol It includes the process of measuring. For example, every time the special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed, the special symbol variation timer value which is the stored value in the special symbol variation timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153 is subtracted from or added to 1, Regardless of whether it is a special figure game using the first special figure on the 1 special symbol display device 4A or a special figure game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B, a common timer is used. The elapsed time is measured. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. In this way, the special symbol variation process of step S112 is the variation of the special symbol in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A, and the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. The variation of the special symbol in the special figure game using the figure may be controlled by a common processing routine. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3".

The special symbol stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the variation of the special symbol is stopped on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the fixed special symbol that is the variable display result of the special symbol is stopped (displayed). It includes a process for making settings for the setting. Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is turned on, and when the big hit flag is turned on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". To be done. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the small hit flag is on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If both the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

The big hit opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". In this big hit opening pre-processing, based on that the variable display result is "big hit", etc., processing to start the execution of the round in the big hit game state and to set the big winning opening to the open state, etc. include. At this time, for example, the upper limit of the period during which the special winning opening is opened may be set depending on whether the big hit type is “non-probable change”, “probable change”, or “probability”. As an example, in response to the big hit type "non-probability change" or "probability change", the upper limit of the period for which the special winning opening is opened is set to "29 seconds", and the maximum winning number is the maximum number of times to execute the round. By setting the number of times the mouth is opened to "15 times", it is sufficient to set the normal open big hit state. On the other hand, when the jackpot type corresponds to "probability", the upper limit of the period for which the special winning opening is opened is set to "0.1 seconds", and the number of opening of the special winning opening is the upper limit of the number of rounds to be executed. By setting "15 times", the short-term open big hit state may be set. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5".

The big hit opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". In this big hit opening process, the process of measuring the elapsed time after the big winning opening is opened, and the big winning opening based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, etc. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the open state from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6". ..

The post-big hit opening process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This big hit opening post processing, processing to determine whether the number of times of execution of the round to open the special winning opening has reached the maximum winning opening maximum number of times, reached the maximum winning opening maximum value In this case, a process for making settings for transmitting a big hit end designation command is included. When the number of executions of the round does not reach the maximum winning opening maximum number, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the maximum winning opening maximum value is reached, the special figure The value of the process flag is updated to "7".

The big hit ending process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". In this big hit ending process, a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state is executed by an effect device such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 It includes a process of waiting until a lapse of time, a process of performing various settings for starting the probability variation control and the time saving control in response to the end of the big hit game state. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

The small hit opening pre-processing of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the big winning opening to be open in the small hit game state based on that the variable display result is "small hit". As an example, when the variable display result is "small hit", the upper limit of the period for which the special winning opening is opened is set in the same manner as when the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability". It is only necessary to set "0.1 seconds" and to set the number of times of opening the special winning opening to "15 times" to set the small hitting game state. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9".

The small hitting open process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small hit opening process is the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening was opened, and the timing to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time etc. A process for determining whether or not it is included is included. When returning the special winning opening to the closed state, a process of stopping the supply of the drive signal to the special winning opening solenoid 82 may be executed.

The small hit ending process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". In this small hit end processing, a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed by the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 is executed. It includes the process of waiting until the time elapses. Here, when the small hitting game state ends, the state of the probability change flag and the time saving flag are not changed, and the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hitting game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hitting game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

Next, the operation of the effect control board 12 will be described.

In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 15. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 15 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122 and set various initial values, and to the effect control board 12. Register settings of the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit) are performed. Then, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S72). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state each time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on the CTC register setting, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S72; No), the process of step S72 is repeatedly executed and stands by.

On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disable, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt processing, among the input ports included in the I/O 125, a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 receives a control signal to be a production control command. Take in. The effect control command fetched at this time is stored in the effect control command receiving buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194, for example. As an example, when the effect control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S72 (step S72; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to the off state (step S73), and the command analysis process is executed (step S74). In the command analysis processing executed in step S74, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the reading is performed. Settings and controls corresponding to the produced control commands are performed.

After executing the command analysis process in step S74, the effect control process process is executed (step S75). In the effect control process processing in step S75, for example, an operation of displaying an effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, an operation of outputting sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation of a decorative light-emitting body such as the game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, The control contents of the production operation using various production devices, such as the drive operation in the production model, are determined, determined, and set according to the production control command transmitted from the main board 11.

After the effect control process process of step S75, the effect random number updating process is executed (step S76), and the effect random numbers counted by the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193 are used as various random number values for effect control. The numerical data indicating is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S72.

FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S75 of FIG. 15 as the effect control process process. In the production control process process shown in FIG. 16, the production control CPU 120 first displays a specific display for displaying a hold display or an in-execution display (specific display) in the starting winning prize memory display area 5H or the changing special figure display area 5I. The process is executed (step S161).

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 performs any one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191, for example. Select and execute.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0". This variable display start waiting process is based on whether or not the first variation start command or the second variation start command from the main board 11 is received, and whether or not the variable display of the decorative pattern in the image display device 5 is started. It includes a process for determining.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". This variable display start setting process corresponds to the variable display of the special symbol being started in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the decorative symbol in the image display device 5. In order to perform variable display and other various production operations, it includes processing for determining a fixed decorative pattern and various production control patterns according to the variation pattern of the special symbol and the type of display result.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In the production process during the variable display, the effect control CPU 120 reads out various control data from the effect control pattern corresponding to the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192, and displays the decorative pattern. Performs various effects during variable display. After performing such effect control, for example, the end code indicating the variable display end of the decorative symbol is read from the special symbol variation effect control pattern, or that the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11 is received. Corresponding to, etc., the fixed decorative design as the final stopped design which is the variable display result of the decorative design is completely stopped and displayed. If the fixed decorative design is completely stopped and displayed in response to the end code being read from the special pattern variation effect control pattern, the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command When the time has elapsed, the variable display result can be confirmed by autonomously deriving and displaying the fixed decorative design on the side of the effect control board 12 without depending on the effect control command from the main board 11. When the fixed decorative design is completely stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3".

The special figure winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "3". In the special figure winning waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received. When the hit start designation command is received and the hit start designation command designates the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is "6" which is a value corresponding to the big hit mid effect processing. To update. On the other hand, when the hit start designation command is received, if the hit start designation command designates the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is a value corresponding to the effect processing during the small hit. Is updated to "4". When the effect control process timer times out without receiving the hit start designation command, it is determined that the special figure display result in the special figure game is "miss", and the value of the effect process flag is the initial value. Update to "0".

The effect process during the small hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is "4". In the effect processing during the small hit, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and displays an effect image based on the setting content on the display screen of the image display device 5. The game effect lamp 9 is operated by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13 to output sound or sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R, and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect control in the small hitting game state such as turning on/off/blinking the decoration LED is executed. Further, in the small hit mid effect production process, for example, in response to receiving a hit end designation command from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "5" which is a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. ..

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hit completion effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and displays an effect image based on the setting contents on the display screen of the image display device 5. The game effect lamp 9 is operated by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13 to output sound or sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R, and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect control at the end of the small hitting game state such as turning on/off/blinking the decoration LED is executed. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”.

The big hit midfield effect process of step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In the big hit mid-hit effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and displays an effect image based on the setting content on the display screen of the image display device 5. Alternatively, by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13 to output sound or sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R, and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14 to the game effect lamp 9 or decoration. Various effect control in the big hit game state such as turning on/off/blinking the LED for use is executed. In the big hit mid-game production process, the value of the production control process flag is updated to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending production process, in response to receiving the hit end designation command from the main board 11, for example.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the big hit game state, and causes an effect image based on the setting contents to be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting game commands (decorative signals) to the lamp control board 14 for game effect lamps 9 and decorations Various effect controls at the end of the big hit game state such as turning on/off/blinking the LED are executed. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”.

FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S161 of FIG. 16 as the specific display process. In the specific display process shown in FIG. 17, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a start winning has occurred due to a game ball entering the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening (step S701). ). In the process of step S701, it is determined whether or not a start winning is generated by determining whether or not a starting mouth winning designation command such as a first starting mouth winning designation command or a second starting mouth winning designation command is received. Good.

When it is determined that the start winning is generated (step S701; Yes), the final display mode (final display mode) of the specific display corresponding to the starting prize and the specific display that is a change pattern of the display mode in the pending display notice A change pattern is determined (step S702).

In the process of step S702, the variable display result and the variation category (variation pattern) are pre-read based on the symbol designation command and the variation category command received together with the starting mouth winning designation command at the time of starting winning, and the final display mode or the specific display change is performed. The pattern is determined. In the process of step S702, the final display mode and the specific display change pattern are determined to determine the pending display notification and the effect mode as the prefetching notification.

In this embodiment, as the display mode (display color) of the specific display, as shown in FIG. 18, “white”, “blue”, “green”, and “red” are provided, and the specific display is displayed. In some cases, a pending display notice in which the display mode changes a predetermined number of times may be executed between the end of the variable display corresponding to the specific display and the end of the variable display. Then, as shown in the determination ratio of FIG. 18, there is a possibility that the final display mode will be a big hit in the order of “white”<“blue”<“green”<“red” (big hit reliability) or super reach. The reliability (super reach reliability) is high.

The display mode of "white" is a display mode when the pending display notice is not executed and is a normal mode. "Blue", "green", and "red" are display modes that change when the pending display notice is being executed, and are notice modes.

In step S702, first, the final display mode may be determined according to the display result, for example, at the determination rate shown in FIG. When the final display mode is determined to be "white", the display color of the specific display does not change. That is, in this case, the reservation display notice is not executed.

In this embodiment, after determining the final display mode of the specific display, the specific display change pattern corresponding to the change process after the specific display is displayed is determined according to the number of holdings at the time of winning. Is becoming FIG. 19 is a diagram showing an example of a specific display change pattern in the case where the final display mode is determined to be “red”, and the number of holdings at winning (the number of holdings including the winning) is “4”. Is. In this case, a pattern PT4-4-0 that does not change from the time of winning and remains “red”, a pattern PT4-4-1 that changes three steps at a time, and a pattern PT4-4- that changes one step and two steps at two times 21 and the like, and patterns PT4-4-41 and the like that change three times in one step are provided. Further, in this embodiment, the display mode of the specific display can be changed when displayed as the pending display and the active display of the pending display numbers 1 to 3, and as shown in FIG. The change timing determines the change timing. For example, in the specific display change pattern PT4-4-2, the display mode is changed from “white” to “red” when displayed as the hold display of the hold display number 1. In this embodiment, the change pattern of the display mode when displayed as the active display is determined by determining the specific display change pattern at the time of winning, but the display mode of the display mode when displayed as the active display is changed. The change pattern may be determined at the start of fluctuation independently of the change pattern of the hold display.

It should be noted that, like the specific display change pattern PT4-4-0 shown in FIG. 19, a pattern in which the display mode is changed in the period up to the first shift is not included although it may be displayed in a notice mode from the time of winning. .. This is because the period up to the first shift depends on the timing of occurrence of the start winning, and therefore the period until execution of the effect may be insufficient. For example, when the start winning occurs just before the end of the variable display, the specific display is shifted immediately.

In this embodiment, an action effect may be executed in which the effect image moves and contacts (acts) toward the specific display before the display mode of the specific display changes. Further, in this embodiment, the change timing of the specific display is after a lapse of a predetermined time after the specific display is shifted, regardless of whether or not the action effect is executed. By doing so, it is possible to secure the execution time of the action effect after the specific display is shifted and before the specific display is changed. The change timing of the specific display is not limited to this. For example, when the effect production is not executed, the display mode may be changed when the specific display is shifted.

When the final display mode is "red" and the winning hold number "4", it may be determined to be one of the specific display change patterns shown in FIG. Although the determination ratio is not shown here, the various degrees of reliability may be changed depending on the change timing, the number of changes, and the like. It should be noted that a plurality of types of specific display change patterns as shown in FIG. 19 may be provided according to the final display mode and the number of times of holding at winning.

If it is decided to execute the pending display notice for the specific display that is already displayed, the execution of the new pending display notice is restricted until the variable display corresponding to the specific display ends. You may do it.

After the final display mode and the specific display change pattern are determined in step S702, the determination result is stored in association with the pending display number and the like (step S703). Then, based on the specific display change pattern, the control for displaying the specific display corresponding to the present start winning is executed (step S704). In step S704, the hold display or the active display may be displayed in the empty display portion of the starting winning memory display area 5H or the changing special map display area 5I in the display mode at the time of winning in the specific display change pattern determined this time.

After executing the process of step S704 or when it is determined that the start winning is not generated (step S701; No), it is determined whether or not it is the shift timing of the hold display (step S705). Since the hold display is shifted when a new variable display is started, it is determined in step S705 whether or not it is the shift display timing of the hold display depending on whether or not the first or second variation start command is received. do it.

When it is determined that it is the shift timing of the hold display (step S705; Yes), the hold display of the display part of the starting prize winning memory display area 5H of the shift source is erased (step S706), and the specific display of the shift destination (hold display) Alternatively, control to display (active display) is executed (step S707). In step S707, if the pending display of the shift source is the advance notice mode, the specific display of the shift destination is displayed in the similar advance notice mode.

After that, it is determined whether or not the current game state is a time saving state (step S708). The current game state can be specified by a game state designation command. The time saving state here may be both the high-accuracy high base state and the low-accuracy high base state, or may be either of them.

When the current game state is the time saving state (step S708; Yes), it is determined whether or not the action effect is executed in this variable display (step S709). On the other hand, if it is not in the time saving state (step S708; No), the specific display process ends. That is, in this embodiment, the action effect may be executed when the game state is the time saving state. The present invention is not limited to this, and the action effect may be executed when the game state is a predetermined state, or the action effect may be executable regardless of the game state. In addition, a plurality of types of effect modes may be provided so that the effect effect may be executed in the case of a predetermined effect mode (for example, a latent probability change mode or a mission mode).

In the process of step S708, whether or not to execute the action effect may be determined, for example, at the determination rate shown in FIG. 20, depending on whether or not the display mode of the specific display changes in the variable display this time. As shown in FIG. 20, when the display mode of the specific display changes, it is decided to execute the action effect at a high rate, and when the display mode of the specific display does not change, the action effect is reduced at a low rate. It is decided to execute. Note that the action effect when the display mode of the specific display does not change is an effect that does not change even if the action effect is executed.

In the process of step S709, when there are a plurality of specific displays, for example, it is determined whether or not the action effect is executed for each specific display in a predetermined order (for example, the order in which the variable display is executed in the later order). decide. Then, when it is determined to execute the action effect for one specific display, the action effect for the other specific display may not be executed. By doing so, the target of the effect production becomes easy to understand. In addition, when the specific display in which the display mode changes is included, the action effect may be preferentially executed for the specific display. Further, in this case, it may be restricted so that the effect effect of Gase is not executed for another specific display. By doing so, the target of the effect effect can be easily understood, and the effect inconsistency can be prevented.

A plurality of action effects may be executed during one variable display by shifting the effect execution timing.

Then, it is determined whether or not it is decided to execute the action effect (step S710). When it is determined that the action effect is not executed (step S710; No), the specific display process ends. When it is determined that the action effect is to be executed (step S710; Yes), the action effect control pattern corresponding to the pending display number to be executed or the active display (display position of the specific display) is selected and set in the predetermined area of the RAM 122. Yes (step S711). The action effect control pattern set here is read in the variable display effect process in step S172, so that the action effect is executed during the variable display. After executing the processing of step S711, the specific display processing ends.

FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a list of action effect control patterns. As shown in FIG. 21, in this embodiment, the start position of the action effect is different depending on the display position of the specific display which is the object (action target) of the action effect. As shown in FIG. 21, when the action destination is the active display, the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 is the start position, and when the action destination is the hold display of the hold display number 1 or 2, the image display is displayed. When the lower right of the screen of the device 5 is the start position and the destination of the action is the hold display of the hold display number 3, the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5 is the start position. Thus, in this embodiment, the position far from the display position of the specific display is the start position of the action effect. By doing so, the distance and the period that act on the specific display become longer, so that the action effect can be focused.

In addition, with respect to the hold display of the hold display number 4 (upper limit display number of the hold display), it may shift immediately after being displayed, and there is a possibility that the execution time of the effect may not be secured. It will never be executed. However, since the specific display change pattern is provided with a pattern that becomes a notice mode from the time of winning, the hold display of the hold display number 4 may be displayed in the notice mode before shifting from the time of winning. In this way, the player can be expected even with the hold display that is not the target of the action effect, so that the interest is improved. In addition, in this embodiment, since the presence/absence of execution of the action effect is determined when the hold display is shifted, it is not determined that the action effect is executed with respect to the hold display before the shift. On the other hand, whether or not to execute the action effect may be determined at the time of winning the start prize. In this case, when there is sufficient time to shift the hold display, the action effect may be performed on the hold display of the hold display number 4 (upper limit display number of the hold display).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, the action effect is started at the start of the variable display, and the effect time of the action effect is uniformly 1300 (ms). This is shorter than the shortest variable display time of 1500 (ms). Therefore, the action effect (and the change of the display mode) can be completed during one variable display. As shown in FIG. 22, a suggestion image indicating that the action effect is executed at the start of the action effect is displayed at the start position of the action effect. Detailed effect operation will be described later.

In this embodiment, the start position of the action effect is determined by selecting the action effect control pattern corresponding to the pending display number to be executed or the active display (display position of the specific display) in the process of step S711. In the process of step S702, the start position may be determined together with the determination of the specific display change pattern, or the start position may be determined every time the variation starts.

When it is determined in step S705 that it is not the shift timing of the hold display (step S705; No), it is determined whether it is the change timing of the display mode of the specific display (step S712). In step S712, whether or not 1300 (ms) has elapsed from the start of the variable display and the stored specific display change pattern changes the display mode in the current variable display (hold display number or active display). It may be determined whether or not there is. If it is not the change timing of the display mode of the specific display (step S712; No), the specific display process ends.

If it is the change timing of the display mode of the specific display (step S712; Yes), the display mode of the target specific display is changed to a color corresponding to the specific display change pattern (step S713). After that, the specific display process ends.

Next, an example of the effect operation when the effect effect is executed will be described. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing the image display device 5 when the action effect is executed. As shown in FIGS. 23A and 23B, when the total number of reserved memories is 4, the reserved displays H1 and H2 and the active display AH of the reserved display numbers 1 and 2 are displayed from the center of the image display device 5. Displayed on the left. Further, the hold displays H3 and H4 of the hold display numbers 3 and 4 are displayed on the right side of the center of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 23(A), when the action effect is performed on the hold display H3 of the hold display number 3, after the suggestion image I1 is displayed at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5, the suggestion I1 is displayed. The action effect in which the image I1 to the image I2 of the star acts on the hold display H3 is executed.

As shown in FIG. 23(B), when the action effect is performed on the hold display H2 of the hold display number 2, after the suggestion image I1 is displayed at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5, An action effect in which the image I2 of the stars from the suggestion image I1 acts on the hold display H2 is executed.

As shown in FIG. 23(C), when the action effect is performed on the hold display H1 of the hold display number 1, after the suggestion image I1 is displayed at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5, The action effect in which the image I2 of the star from the suggestion image I1 acts on the hold display H1 is executed.

As described above, in this embodiment, there are a plurality of start positions (starting directions) of the effect effect, and the start position of the effect effect differs depending on the display position of the hold display (specific display). In this way, since the start position of the action effect changes according to the position of the hold display, the interest of the action effect is improved.

In this embodiment, the start position of the action effect with respect to the hold display is two places at the lower right and the lower left, but the position farther from the hold display is the start position of the action effect. By doing so, the display distance of the image to be made to act in the action effect becomes long, so that the player can easily pay attention to the action effect. The start position of the action effect with respect to the hold display may be other than the lower right or lower left. For example, when the start position is other than the lower right or lower left, the jackpot reliability may be increased, the change rate of the hold display of the action target may be increased, or the number of change steps may be increased. May be.

When the action effect is performed on the hold display H1 of the hold display number 1, the distance from the start position to the action destination is greater than when the action effect is performed on the hold display H2 of the hold display number 2. Becomes distant. The hold display H1 is also the hold display farthest from the start position. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21, since the effect time of the effect effect is constant, as shown in FIGS. 23(B) and 23(C), the effect effect for the hold display H1 of the hold display number 1 is held. The orbit of the star image I2 is lower (the moving distance is shorter) as compared with the effect of the display number 2 on the hold display H2. By doing so, it is possible to preferably execute the action effect even if the distance from the action effect start position to the action destination is different. The timing of the star image I2 acting on the hold display H1 may be advanced by making the orbit of the star image I2 the same and increasing the moving speed.

As shown in FIG. 23D, when the action effect is performed on the active display AH, after the suggestion image I3 different from the suggestion image I1 is displayed on the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5, An action effect in which the suggestion image I3 acts on the active display AH is executed. Thus, the action effect for the active display is a special action effect different from the action effect for the hold display. By performing such a special action effect, the interest of the effect is improved.

It should be noted that a special action effect may be executed for the hold display, or a normal action effect may be executed for the active display. In this case, various expectations (variation rate of specific display, reliability, etc.) may be different depending on whether it is a special effect or a normal effect.

In addition, in FIG. 23, the case where four hold displays are displayed in the starting winning prize memory display area 5H has been described. In this case, the hold displays of the hold display numbers 1 to 4 may be displayed on the left side of the center of the image display device 5, and the hold displays of the hold display numbers 5 to 8 may be displayed on the right side of the center of the image display device 5. The start position of the action effect for the hold display numbers 1 to 4 is the right side (lower right) of the image display device 5, and the start position of the action effect to the hold display numbers 5 to 7 is the left side (lower left) of the image display device 5. do it.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. In the above-described embodiment, the start position (starting direction) of the action effect is different depending on the display position of the specific display, but the change rate of the target specific display, the number of change stages, the jackpot reliability, the super reach reliability, The starting position may be changed according to the number of reserved memories. Further, the determination rate of the start position may be changed based on these. By doing so, it is possible to have a sense of expectation with respect to the start position of the action effect.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the action effect is performed on the hold display and the active display, but the action effect may be performed only on the hold display. In the case where the action effect is executed only for the hold display, the present invention can be applied to the gaming machine without the changing special figure display area 5I.

In the above-described embodiment, the effect time of the action effect is uniformly 1300 (ms), which is shorter than the shortest variable display time of 1500 (ms). The present invention is not limited to this, and there may be a pattern with a long production time. For example, the effect time of the effect effect with respect to the hold display number 1 that is farthest from the start position of the effect effect may be longer than the effect time of other effect effects. By doing so, the trajectory and the moving speed of the image to be applied to the hold display can be made similar to those of other action effects. In this case, since the time for which the image to be operated for the hold display is displayed becomes long, it becomes easier for the player to pay attention to the action effect. In this case, for an action effect having a long effect time, the start timing of the action effect (movement of an image on which it acts) may be advanced. For example, the start timings of action effects with different effect times may be different, and the end timings of action effects may be the same.

A plurality of action effect control patterns having different effect times may be prepared and one of the action effect control patterns (effect time) may be determined based on the change pattern (change time) or the like. Further, when the action effect is executed in a pattern having a long effect time, the action effect may be executed over a plurality of variable displays.

When the action effect is started, the visibility of the image (the suggestion image or the like) used for the action effect and the effect image (the background image or the like) other than the specific display may be reduced. For example, until the action effect is completed, the suggestion image and a specific display other than the target of the action effect are displayed in a blackout or dark so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize. By doing so, the suggestive image and the specific display that is the target of the action effect can be emphasized and displayed, and the action effect can be more easily noticed.

In the above embodiment, the start position of the action effect is determined to be far from the display position of the specific display, but the start position of the action effect is determined at a predetermined rate according to the display position of the specific display. You may do it. In this case, the start position far from the display position of the specific display may be determined at a high rate.

Further, the start position of the action effect may be closer to the display position of the specific display.

When the action effect is continuously executed in a plurality of variable displays, the start position of the action effect may be different for each variable display. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the action effect from being continuously executed from the same direction and becoming difficult to understand. Further, the larger the number of times the action effect is executed for one specific display, the higher the change rate, the number of change stages, the jackpot reliability, and the super reach reliability of the target specific display may be. By doing so, it is possible to increase the expectation that the action effect will be continuously executed. Further, the action effect may be executed a plurality of times in one variable display.

The action effect of Gase may be executed from a predetermined direction (for example, the lower left of the screen). By doing so, it is possible to infer the degree of expectation by the fact that the action effect has not been executed from the direction in which it should be executed.

The suggestion image may be changed according to the start position of the action effect. Further, the suggestion image itself may act on the hold display. Further, the suggestion image may be changed according to the action destination of the action effect. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the action effect from being continuously executed from the same direction and becoming difficult to understand.

Further, a movable accessory 200 capable of performing a predetermined operation may be provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 to execute an accessory effect of operating the accessory 200. For example, the accessory 200 is a motor for a accessory (may be another actuator) on the front side of the image display device 5 in the downward direction, that is, on the front side of the screen of the image display device 5 as seen from the player. It is configured to be movable. The standby position (initial position) of the accessory 200 is the center of the upper portion of the image display device 5. The accessory 200 can be moved from the standby position to the front side of the display areas 5H and 5I for displaying the hold display and the active display. The accessory 200 may be configured to be capable of emitting light by a light emitting device such as an LED.

FIG. 24 shows an example of the effect operation when the display mode of the hold display after the effect effect by the character changes. FIG. 24 shows a case where the character CHR-A acts on the hold display, unlike the above embodiment. In the example shown in FIG. 24, the changing special map display area 5I is provided in the lower center of the image display device 5, and the starting winning award memory display area 5H is on the left and right of the changing special map display area 5I (left is the first special map, The right corresponds to the second special figure).

FIG. 24A shows the image display device 5 in which variable display is executed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the active display AH and the hold displays H1 and H2 are displayed. FIG. 24B shows the start timing of the first half of the action effect by the character. In this way, the character CHR-A is displayed at a position where it does not suffer even if the accessory 200 moves.

FIG. 24C shows that the character effect is being executed by the character object 200. In this way, the accessory 200 is moved to a position that covers at least a part of the starting winning prize memory display area 5H in which the hold display of the target is displayed. Here, the accessory 200 is completely covered by the hold display H2 of the target.

FIG. 24D shows the second half of the action effect by the character being executed. In this way, the character CHR-A acts on the hold display H2 while not being hidden by the accessory 200. That is, the action effect is executed in a state where it is not hidden by the accessory 200.

FIG. 24E shows the timing of the pending change effect. In this way, as a result of the action effect, the hold change effect in which the mode (display color here) of the hold display H2 changes is executed.

As described above, in this modified example, when the accessory effect is executed during the period in which the effect effect is executed, the specific display is not incurred at least when the change of the display mode of the specific display (preliminary display notice) is executed. The accessory 200 is operated as described above. By doing so, the character effect can be performed afterward without impairing the visibility of the specific display. Then, the player can promptly confirm the change mode of the specific display. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

When performing the character effect during the period in which the effect effect is executed, the character object 200 is operated so as not to receive the specific display at least when the change of the display mode of the specific display (preliminary display of the hold display) is executed. Any control may be used for this. For example, when the character effect and the effect effect are determined by different processes, when the effect effect is executed, the effect patterns of the character effect and the effect effect which are not covered are determined. Good. In addition, when the action effect (preliminary change notice) is executed, the effect pattern (preliminary notice change) and the effect pattern of the accessory effect that is not covered may be determined.

The action effect (display of the suggestion image) may be started from a position that does not overlap the decorative pattern or the reduced decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the variable display of the decorative pattern from being deteriorated due to the effect.

In addition, as in the modified example in FIG. 24, when the starting winning prize memory display area 5H is provided on the left and right of the changing special figure display area 5I (left corresponds to the first special figure, right corresponds to the second special figure) The start position of the action effect may be far from or close to the position where the specific display of the action target is shifted (digested).

In addition, as in the modified example in FIG. 24, when the starting winning prize memory display area 5H is provided on the left and right of the changing special figure display area 5I (left corresponds to the first special figure, right corresponds to the second special figure) The start position of the action effect may be different depending on the direction in which the specific display is shifted (digested). For example, the action effect may be started in the direction in which the specific display is shifted (forward direction), or the action effect may be started in the opposite direction in which the specific display is shifted. May be.

In the modified example in FIG. 24, the action effect for the active display may be started from a position close to the accessory 200. By doing so, it becomes easier to pay attention to the action effect, and the interest of the effect can be improved by linking the action effect and the action of the accessory 200.

A predetermined period is provided from the display of the suggestion image to the execution of the effect effect, and the display mode of the suggestion image may change in the period from the display of the suggestion image to the execution of the effect effect. There may be. In this modified example, the action effects of the first pattern to the third pattern are provided.

FIG. 25: is a figure for demonstrating the effect of a modification. FIG. 25A is a diagram showing a display example of the image display device 5 at the start of fluctuation. 25(b), (d), and (f) are diagrams showing display examples of the image display device 5 at the time when the suggestion image is displayed when the action effect is executed. 25C, 25E, and 25G are diagrams showing display examples of the image display device 5 when the action effects of the first pattern to the third pattern in the modified example are executed, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 25( a ), the state in which the left, middle, and right decorative designs are being variably displayed is indicated by three downward arrows. It is assumed that, from the state of FIG. 25A, a new starting winning is generated and the starting winning is accompanied by an action effect (including a goose effect that does not change the hold). Such a hold display will be described below as a target hold TH. As shown in FIG. 25( b ), when the target hold TH occurs and is displayed in the starting winning prize memory display area 5H, the first character image 91 as a suggestive image is displayed. The first character image 91 has a humanoid shape and is displayed with the image indicated by the arrow on the right hand.

From the state of FIG. 25B, the effect production of the first pattern shown in FIG. 25C is executed during the execution of the previous variable display in which the variable display of the target hold TH is started. In the first pattern of action effect, an effect of throwing the arrow image that the first character image 91 displayed first has toward the target holding TH is executed. However, as shown in FIG. 25C, the arrow image does not reach the target hold TH and stalls on the way without acting on the target hold TH. In this way, the action effect of the first pattern of the gasse in which the action effect is executed but the holding change does not actually occur is shown in FIGS. 25B and 25C.

Further, as shown in FIG. 25D, when the target hold TH occurs and the target hold TH is displayed in the starting winning prize memory display area 5H from the state of FIG. 25A, a second character image 92 as a suggestion image is displayed. To be done. The second character image 92 is displayed in a human-shaped form with an image indicated by an arrow on the right hand, and is different in color from the first character image 91, for example.

From the state of FIG. 25D, the second pattern of action effect shown in FIG. 25E is executed during execution of the previous variable display in which the variable display of the target hold TH is started. In the action effect of the second pattern, an effect of throwing the arrow image that the first character image 92 displayed first has toward the target holding TH is executed. As shown in FIG. 25(e), the arrow image acts on the hold display by piercing the target hold TH, and the display mode of the target hold TH changes from normal white (white circle in the figure) to the jackpot expectation level. It changes to a high red color (black circle in the figure). By changing the display mode of the target hold TH, it is possible to expect that the hold display will be a big hit.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 25F from the state of FIG. 25A, the first character image 91 as a suggestive image is displayed when the target hold TH occurs and is displayed in the starting winning prize memory display area 5H. To be done.

From the state of FIG. 25(f), the effect production of the third pattern shown in FIG. 25(g) is executed during execution of the previous variable display in which the variable display of the target hold TH is started. In the third pattern action effect, the character image is changed from the first character image 91 to the second character image 92 in a predetermined period until the effect in which the first displayed first character image 91 throws the arrow image is executed. Change. Specifically, the character image changes from the first character image 91 to the second character image 92 during the execution of the preceding variable display in which the variable display of the target hold TH is started. Then, an effect of throwing the arrow image that the second character image 92 has toward the target holding TH is executed. As shown in FIG. 25(g), the arrow image acts on the hold display by being stuck in the target hold TH, and the display mode of the target hold TH changes from normal white (white circle in the figure) to the jackpot expectation level. It changes to a high red color (black circle in the figure). By executing such action effect, the process of action effect can be paid attention to, and the interest of the game is improved. Note that the display timing of the suggestion image, the change timing of the character image, and the action timing of the image with respect to the hold display may be any timing from the display of the target hold to the end of the variable display corresponding to the target hold. ..

In this modification, when the second character image 92 is displayed, the rate of change in the pending display and the reliability are higher than when the first character image 91 is displayed as the suggestion image. do it. By providing the third pattern in which the first character image 91 changes to the second character image 92 before the action effect is executed, the degree of expectation is displayed even when the first character image 91 having a low degree of expectation is displayed. Since the second character image 92 having a high value may change, the player's expectation can be maintained. It should be noted that the second pattern and the third pattern may have the same degree of expectation (the rate at which the pending display changes or the degree of reliability) or may have a higher degree of expectation. If the third pattern has a higher expectation, and the suggestion image with a lower expectation is displayed, the expectation is higher when the suggestion image changes, so the player's expectation should be maintained. You can

In the above-described embodiment, in order to notify the effect control board (sub-side) of the change pattern indicating the change time and the change mode such as the type of reach effect, the presence or absence of pseudo-relation, one change at the time of starting the change. Although the example of transmitting the pattern command is shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control board by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying with two commands, the main board (main side) uses the first command such as presence/absence of pseudo-relationship and presence/absence of sliding effect before reaching reach (so-called when not reaching. A command (for example, a previous fluctuation pattern designation command) indicating a fluctuation time or a fluctuation mode (for example, a previous fluctuation pattern) of before the second stop is transmitted, and the second command indicates the type of reach and the presence/absence of re-lottery effect. A command (for example, a post-variation pattern designating command) indicating a variation time or a variation mode (for example, a post-variation pattern) after the reach is reached (after a so-called second stop if the reach is not reached) may be transmitted. ..

In this case, the effect control board may perform effect control in variable display based on the variable time derived from the combination of the two commands. The main board may notify the change time by each of two commands, and the effect control board may select a specific change mode executed at each timing. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after a predetermined period has elapsed after sending the first command (for example, the next timer interrupt). (In) the second command may be transmitted. The variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the transmission order can be changed as appropriate. By thus notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the fluctuation pattern command can be reduced.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, whether the display mode of the hold storage display in the look-ahead notice production is generated based on the start winning due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening, or the second It was the same regardless of whether it was generated based on the start winning award due to the game ball passing through (entering) the starting winning opening, but the game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening The display mode (color, shape, etc.) is generated depending on whether the game is generated based on the start winning a prize or the start winning due to the game ball passing (entering) the second starting prize hole. ) May be different.

In the process of step S403 shown in FIG. 14, the determination is performed using the special figure display result determination table data selected in the process of step S402. In this way, as the jackpot determination data indicating the jackpot determination range used to determine whether or not the variable display result is determined to be a "jackpot", a predetermined number when the gaming state is not the sure change state (high-precision state). The normal determination data including the jackpot determination value and the special determination data including the jackpot determination value larger than the predetermined number when the gaming state is the probability change state are provided, and when the start winning occurs When the gaming state is not the probability variation state, the variable display result is determined using the normal determination data, while when the game state when the start winning occurs is the probability variation state, the variable display result is used by using the special determination data. judge. Here, when the gaming state is the probability change state, the variable display result is determined as "big hit" using the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, which is extracted based on the occurrence of the start winning. When it is determined that the jackpot type is determined to be “non-probable variation” using the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the probability variation control is not performed after the jackpot gaming state ends, The execution of the pre-reading notice effect based on the start winning that has occurred within the period until the probability variation control ends based on the display result in the variable display that is the subject of the determination may be restricted. As a result, even if the probability variation control ends, the look-ahead preview effect is executed based on the determination result that the variable display result is determined to be "big hit" using the special determination data corresponding to the probability variation state. This can be prevented and the consistency of the effect contents can be maintained.

In the above embodiment, the special drawing game using the first special map is executed based on the detection of the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening, and the game that has passed (entering) the second starting winning opening. The special figure game using the second special figure is executed based on the detection of a sphere. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a special drawing game using a common special symbol is executed regardless of which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball passes (enters). It may be one.

Other than that, the device configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the data configuration, the process shown in the flowchart, various performance operations including the performance image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5 depart from the spirit of the present invention. Changes and modifications are possible within the range not specified.

In addition, in the gaming machine of the present invention, a game ball is paid out to the player as a prize, and the player launches the paid out game ball (which may be a rental ball) to the game area to perform a game. Although it was a gaming machine, it gives a game score for use in a game by using a frequency that is a game value of a size specified by information recorded on a game recording medium such as a prepaid card or a membership card. The present invention is also applicable to a gaming machine in which a player plays a game by hitting a game ball enclosed in the gaming machine into a game area by using the granted game score or the game score awarded by a prize for the game. You can

That is, based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the starting area provided in the game area, a variable display means is provided for variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified, and deriving and displaying the display result. This is a gaming machine that controls to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player when a predetermined specific display result is derived and displayed on the display means. However, when the gaming score is not 0, the gaming score is used in the gaming machine. A game is played by hitting the game ball enclosed in the game area, the game score is subtracted according to the hitting of the game ball, and the game score is awarded when the game ball is won in the prize area provided in the game area. The present invention can be applied to a gaming machine that adds. Such a game machine has a game recording medium insertion slot for inserting a game recording medium in which information capable of specifying the magnitude of the game value that can be used for adding game points is recorded, and a game recording medium. It may be provided with a game recording medium processing means for reading the record information recorded in the game recording medium inserted in the medium insertion slot.

What is displayed during variable display of the special symbol is only one type of deviating symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-"), and variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinction of the symbol. .. Further, even when the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above-described embodiment, the main side makes the prefetch judgment and sends the command corresponding to the judgment result to the sub side, but the main side sends the command indicating the random number value to make the preread judgment on the sub side. You may do it.

In the above embodiment, by determining the jackpot type at the start of fluctuation, it is determined whether or not the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state is set to the “probably changed state”, but at the start of fluctuation, the big winning opening pattern ( Only the mode of the round game) is determined (it may be specified by the type of big hit etc.), and the big hit game is based on the fact that the game ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area in the special winning opening) during the big hit game state. The gaming state after the state may be set to the “probably changed state”.

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, and the computer device or the like in advance. It may be distributed by being pre-installed in the storage device included in. Further, the program and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game execution mode is not limited to that executed by mounting a removable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in the internal memory or the like. Alternatively, the hardware resources of other devices may be directly used on the network connected via a communication line. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes and additions within the scope not departing from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other examples of the embodiments described later.

In addition, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and configurations shown in later-described form examples and modified examples may be arbitrarily combined.

In addition, it should be considered that the above-described embodiment and the below-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplifications in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description and the following description but by the claims, and is intended to include meanings equivalent to the claims and all modifications within the scope.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is, in addition, a gaming machine capable of executing variable display (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1), and a specific display capable of displaying a specific display related to the variable display (for example, hold display, active display). By means of means (for example, start winning a prize memory display area 5H, changing special map display area 5I) and the effect image on the specific display, it is possible to execute an effect effect that changes the display mode of the specific display. Means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control that executes the processing of steps S709, S711, and S172), and control means (for example, microcomputer 90100 for effect control) that performs control based on the received command (for example, effect control command). , A first storage area in which the received command is initially stored (for example, a reception register included in the serial communication circuit 90115) and a second storage area in which the received command is temporarily stored (for example, for delivery provided in the internal RAM 90112) Buffer) and a third storage area (for example, an analysis buffer provided in the external SDRAM 90116) in which the received command is finally stored, and the control means receives each command. Based on an interrupt (for example, serial reception interrupt), a first storage control unit (for example, a step in the effect control microcomputer 90100) that reads out a command stored in the first storage region and stores the command in the second storage region. Second, which reads out the command stored in the second storage area and stores it in the third storage area based on a portion that executes S90721 to S90723) and a timer interrupt that occurs every predetermined period (for example, 1 ms). Storage control means (for example, the portion of the production control microcomputer 90100 that executes steps S90741 to S90748) and analysis means for analyzing the command stored in the third storage area (for example, the step in the production control microcomputer 90100). S90704 is executed), and the action effect execution means changes the start position of the action effect according to the display position of the specific display which is the execution target of the action effect (for example, FIG. 21, FIG. 23). A game machine characterized by.

According to the above gaming machine, the interest is improved. Further, when a large number of commands are received, it is possible to reduce the omission of commands.

In the above gaming machine, control of specific display or control of action effect may be performed based on the command received by the control means. According to this, since the control means reduces the omission of the command, it becomes possible to control the specific display and the control of the effect based on more accurate information. Therefore, the reliability of the specific display and the effect production is enhanced, and the interest of the production can be further enhanced.

It should be noted that when at least a part of the commands is missed, the display of the specific display and the execution of the action effect may be restricted. As the display restriction of the specific display, the specific display may not be displayed, the specific display may be displayed only in a mode with low expectation, or it is possible to recognize that the command is dropped. The specific display may be displayed in a dedicated mode. As the execution restriction of the action effect, the effect effect may not be executed, the execution ratio of the effect effect may be reduced, and as a result, the display mode of the specific display does not change. It is also possible that only the effect production can be executed. According to this, it is possible to prevent the reliability of the performance from being reduced and the interest to be reduced due to the performance being executed by the information with low reliability.

Furthermore, as an example of the form of the gaming machine that can reduce the missed command when a large number of commands are received, it is a gaming machine that can play a game, and the received command (for example, a production control command) Based on the control means (for example, effect control microcomputer 90100), a first storage area (for example, a reception register included in the serial communication circuit 90115) in which the received command is first stored, and the received command Is temporarily stored (for example, a transfer buffer provided in the built-in RAM 90112) and a third storage area where the received command is finally stored (for example, an analysis buffer provided in an external SDRAM 90116). ) And the control means reads the command stored in the first storage area and stores it in the second storage area based on a reception interrupt (for example, serial reception interrupt) generated each time a command is received. The second storage area based on the first storage control means (for example, the portion of the effect control microcomputer 90100 that executes steps S90721 to S90723) and the timer interrupt that occurs at predetermined intervals (for example, 1 ms). Stored in the third storage area, and second storage control means for reading the command stored in the third storage area and storing it in the third storage area (for example, the portion of the effect control microcomputer 90100 that executes steps S90741 to S90748). A game machine characterized by including an analyzing means for analyzing a command (for example, a portion of the effect control microcomputer 90100 which executes step S90704). Hereinafter, an example of a form example of this gaming machine will be described as another form example.

(Other form examples)
Hereinafter, another embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 901, which is an example of a gaming machine, will be described. FIG. 26 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 901 as seen from the front.

The pachinko gaming machine 901 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 901 has a frame-shaped glass door frame 902 that is openably and closably provided in the game frame. The game frame is a front frame (not shown) installed to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanical components and the like are attached, and various components attached to them (games to be described later). (Excluding the board 906).

On the lower surface of the glass door frame 902, there is a hit ball supply plate (upper plate) 903. Below the hitting ball supply plate 903, a surplus ball receiving tray 904 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply plate 903, and a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 905 for firing a hit ball are provided. A game board 906 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 902. The game board 906 is a structure including a plate-shaped body that constitutes the game board 906 and various components attached to the plate-shaped body. Further, on the front surface of the game board 906, a game area 907 in which the driven game balls can flow down is formed.

An effect display device 909 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 907. On the display screen of the effect display device 909, there is an effect symbol display area for performing variable display of effect symbols in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Therefore, the effect display device 909 corresponds to a variable display device that variably displays effect symbols. In the effect symbol display area, for example, there is a symbol display area that variably displays effect symbols for three decorations (for effect) of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. The symbol display areas include “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas, but the position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed on the display screen of the effect display device 909, and the symbol may be fixed. The three areas of the display area may be separated. The effect display device 909 is controlled by the effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed on the first special symbol display device 908a, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display device 909 to perform the effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol is displayed. When the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed on the symbol display device 908b, the effect display is executed on the effect display device 909 along with the variable display, so that the progress of the game can be easily grasped. ..

Further, in the effect display device 909, the symbols other than the symbol which is the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol among the left and right middle symbols) are continued for a predetermined time, and the jackpot symbols (for example, the left, middle, and right symbols are arranged in the same symbol) In the state of matching with the combination of symbols), the state of swinging, scaling or deforming, or multiple symbols fluctuating in sync with the same symbol, or the position of the display symbol is swapped. Then, an effect performed in a state in which the possibility of a big hit continues before the final result is displayed (hereinafter, these states are referred to as a reach state) is referred to as a reach effect. Further, the reach state and the state thereof are referred to as the reach mode. Furthermore, the variable display that includes the reach effect is called the reach variable display. Then, when the display result of the symbols variably displayed on the effect display device 909 is not the big hit symbol, the result is “out”, and the variable display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

In the upper right part of the display screen of the effect display device 909, fourth symbol display areas 909c and 909d for displaying a fourth symbol next to the effect symbol and special symbols and normal symbols described later are provided. In this embodiment, the fourth symbol display area 909c for the first special symbol in which the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol to be described later, and the second There is provided a fourth symbol display area 909d for the second special symbol in which the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol.

In this embodiment, the variable display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol (however, accurately, the variable display of the effect symbol varies on the effect control microcomputer 90100 side. It is performed by measuring the fluctuation time recognized based on the pattern command.), when performing the effect using the effect display device 909, for example, the effect content including the variable display of the effect pattern disappears from the screen for a moment. There are diversified production modes, such as productions and productions in which a movable object shields all or part of the screen. Therefore, even when looking at the display screen on the effect display device 909, it may be difficult to recognize whether or not it is currently in the variable display state. Therefore, in this embodiment, by performing a variable display of the fourth symbol on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 909, by confirming the state of the fourth symbol, is it currently in the variable display state? Whether or not it can be surely recognized. The fourth symbol is always variably displayed in a constant motion, and is not disappeared from the screen or shielded by a shield, so that it can always be visually recognized.

The fourth symbol for the first special symbol and the fourth symbol for the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as the fourth symbol, and the fourth symbol display area 909c and the second special symbol for the first special symbol. The fourth symbol display area 909d for symbols may be collectively referred to as a fourth symbol display area.

The variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol is realized by continuing to turn on and off the fourth symbol display areas 909c and 909d in a predetermined display color (for example, blue) at regular time intervals. .. The variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 908a and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 909c for the first special symbol are synchronized. The variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 908b and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 909d for the second special symbol are synchronized. Note that “variable display is synchronized” means that the variable display start time and the variable display time are the same, and the variable display period is the same. Further, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a, a display color (a display color different from the deviant. For example, deviant to the deviant) in the fourth symbol display area 909c for the first special symbol. Sometimes it is displayed in blue, whereas it is displayed in red when it is a big hit.In addition, depending on the type of big hit (the display color may be different depending on whether it is a normal big hit or a probability variation big hit). When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b, the display color reminding the big hit in the fourth symbol display area 909d for the second special symbol (a display color different from the deviant) For example, when it is out of focus, it is displayed in blue, whereas when it is a big hit, it is displayed in red. It should be noted that the display color can be changed according to the kind of big hit (normal big hit or probability variation big hit). The display color when the fourth symbol display areas 909c and 909d are turned off is the same as the background image when turned off, so as to prevent the background image from disappearing. It is desirable that the display color is different from the image (for example, black).

In addition, in this embodiment, the case where the fourth symbol display area is provided in a part of the display screen of the effect display device 909 is shown. However, apart from the effect display device 909, a light emitting body such as a lamp or an LED is used. You may make it implement|achieve the 4th symbol display area. In this case, for example, the variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol may be realized by continuing the state where the two LEDs are alternately turned on, and any one of the two LEDs is stopped. It may be possible to indicate whether or not the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed depending on whether it is displayed.

Further, in this embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are shown to correspond to the respective fourth symbol display areas 909c and 909d, but the first special symbol and the second special symbol are shown. A fourth symbol display area common to the symbols may be provided on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 909. Moreover, you may make it implement|achieve the 4th symbol display area common to a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol using a light-emitting body, such as a lamp and LED. In this case, when the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol, and when the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol, For example, the variable display of the fourth symbol may be distinguished and executed by performing a display in which lights of different display colors are repeatedly turned on and off at regular time intervals. In addition, when the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol, and when the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol, for example, Alternatively, the variable display of the fourth symbol may be distinguished and executed by performing display such that lighting and extinction are repeated at different time intervals. Further, for example, when the stop symbol corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is derived and displayed, and when the stop symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is derived and displayed, it is the same big hit symbol. Alternatively, the stop symbols in different modes may be stopped and displayed.

On the lower left side of the game board 906, a first special symbol display device (first variable display portion) 908a that variably displays the first special symbol as identification information is provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display device 908a is realized by a simple and small-sized display device (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying the numbers 0 to 9. That is, the first special symbol display device 908a is configured to variably display the numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. On the lower right side of the game board 906, a second special symbol display device (second variable display portion) 908b that variably displays the second special symbol as identification information is provided. The second special symbol display device 908b is realized by a simple and small-sized display device (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying the numbers 0 to 9. That is, the second special symbol display device 908b is configured to variably display the numbers (or symbols) of 0 to 9.

The small display is formed in a square shape, for example. Further, in this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both numbers 0 to 9), but the types may be different. Further, the first special symbol display device 908a and the second special symbol display device 908b may be respectively configured to variably display numbers (or two-digit symbols) of 00 to 99, for example.

Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 908a and the second special symbol indicator 908b are collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator (variable display section). I have something to do.

In addition, in this embodiment, although the case where two special symbol display devices 908a and 908b are provided is shown, the gaming machine may be provided with only one special symbol display device.

The variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition that is the execution condition of the variable display is satisfied (for example, the game ball is the first start winning opening 9013 or the second starting winning opening). After passing 9014 (including winning), the start condition of the variable display (for example, when the number of pending storage is not 0, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed It is a state, and started based on the fact that the big hit game is not executed) is established, and when the variable display time (variation time) elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. It should be noted that passing a game ball means that the game ball has passed through a predetermined winning area such as a winning opening or a gate, and includes a concept that the gaming ball has entered (winning) the winning opening. Is. Derivative display of the display result means that the symbol (an example of identification information) is finally stopped and displayed.

Below the effect display device 909, a winning device having a first starting winning opening 9013 is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 9013 is guided to the back surface of the game board 906 and detected by the first starting opening switch 9013a.

Further, below the winning device having the first starting winning opening (first starting opening) 9013, a variable winning ball device 9015 having a second starting winning opening 9014 in which a game ball can be won is provided. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second starting opening) 9014 is guided to the back surface of the game board 906 and detected by the second starting opening switch 9014a. The variable winning ball device 9015 is opened by a solenoid 9016. When the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the open state, the game ball can be won in the second start winning port 9014 (it becomes easy to start winning), which is in an advantageous state for the player. When the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the open state, the game balls are more likely to be won in the second starting winning port 9014 than in the first starting winning port 9013. In addition, in the state where the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second starting winning port 9014. Therefore, in the state where the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the closed state, it is easier to win the game ball in the first starting winning port 9013 than in the second starting winning port 9014. It should be noted that in the state where the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the closed state, it may be difficult to win the prize, but it may be possible to win the prize (that is, it is difficult for the game ball to win the prize).

Hereinafter, the first start winning opening 9013 and the second starting winning opening 9014 may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

When the variable winning ball device 9015 is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball heading for the variable winning ball device 9015 is extremely easy to win the second start winning port 9014. Although the first start winning opening 9013 is provided directly below the effect display device 909, the interval between the lower end of the effect displaying device 909 and the first start winning opening 9013 can be further reduced, or the first start winning opening 9013 can be obtained. The nails are densely arranged around 9013, or the nail arrangement around the first starting winning opening 9013 is difficult to lead the game ball to the first starting winning opening 9013, and the winning rate of the second starting winning opening 9014 It is also possible to make the value higher than the winning rate of the first start winning port 9013.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 26, the variable winning ball apparatus 9015 that opens and closes only the second starting winning opening 9014 is provided, but the first starting winning opening 9013 and the second winning opening 9013 are provided. A variable winning ball apparatus that opens and closes any of the starting winning openings 9014 may be provided.

On the side of the first special symbol display device 908a, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first starting winning opening 9013, that is, the first reserved memory number (reserved memory is also referred to as starting memory or starting winning memory) is displayed. A first special symbol reservation storage display 9018a composed of four displays is provided. The 1st special symbol reservation storage indicator 9018a increases the number of the indicator which lights each time there is an effective starting winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display device 908a is started, the number of lighted display devices is reduced by one.

On the side of the second special symbol display 908b, the second special symbol reserved memory display 9018b consisting of four displays for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning port 9014, that is, the second reserved memory. Is provided. The second special symbol hold storage display 9018b increases the number of display devices to be turned on by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display device 908b is started, the number of lighted display devices is reduced by one.

In addition, at the bottom of the display screen of the effect display device 909, a first hold storage display unit 909a that displays the first hold storage number and a second hold storage display unit 909b that displays the second hold storage number are provided. ing. The first hold display is displayed on the first hold storage display unit 909a corresponding to each of the first hold memories. Further, the second hold storage display section 909b displays a second hold display corresponding to each of the second hold storages. In addition, in this embodiment, the case where the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number are individually displayed is shown, but it is a total number of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number. You may comprise so that the total pending|holding storage display part which displays the number of pending|holding memories may be provided. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of satisfied execution conditions in which the variable display start condition is not satisfied. Further, in the case of such a configuration, the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory are displayed side by side in the winning order to the first starting winning opening 9013 and the second starting winning opening 9014 in the combined holding storage display unit. , So that it is recognizable whether it is the first reserved memory or the second reserved memory (for example, the first reserved memory is displayed in red and the second reserved memory is displayed in blue). You may comprise.

Effect display device 909, during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 908a, and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 908b, for decoration (for production) Variable display of the effect design as the design of. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 908a and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 909 are synchronized. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 908b and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 909 are synchronized. Further, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 908a, and when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 908b, a production symbol that reminds the big hit on the effect display device 909. The combination of is stopped and displayed.

In this embodiment, as will be described later, the game control microcomputer 90560 for controlling the variable display of the special symbol transmits a variation pattern command capable of specifying the variation time, and the production control microcomputer 90100 receives it. The variable display of the effect design is controlled according to the variable time specified by the changed pattern command. Therefore, since the variation time is specified based on the variation pattern command, the variation display of the special symbol and the variation display of the effect symbol should be executed in synchronization in principle. However, in the unlikely event that the data of the variation pattern command is garbled, the variation time recognized by the game control microcomputer 90560 side and the variation time recognized by the effect control microcomputer 90100 side There may be a gap between them. Therefore, if an unexpected situation such as garbled command data occurs, the variable display of the special symbol and the variable display of the effect symbol may not be completely synchronized.

A movable member 9078, which is attached to the rotation shaft of the motor 9086 and moves when the motor 9086 rotates, is provided on the left side of the decoration portion around the effect display device 909. In this embodiment, the movable member 9078 operates when the notice effect (movable object notice effect) or the super reach effect is executed. It should be noted that the movable member 9078 may be operated not only in the movable object notice effect and the super reach effect, but also in the pseudo effect, for example.

Further, as shown in FIG. 26, a special variable winning ball device 9020 is provided below the variable winning ball device 9015. The special variable winning ball device 9020 includes an opening/closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 908a, the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display device 908b. In the specific game state (big hit game state) that occurs when is displayed and displayed, the open/close plate is controlled by the solenoid 9021 to be in the open state, so that the special winning opening, which is the winning area, is in the open state. The game ball that has won the special winning opening is detected by the count switch 9023.

The gaming area 906 is also provided with winning holes (ordinary winning holes) 9029, 9030, 9033, 9039 for paying out a predetermined number of prize gaming balls determined in advance based on winning of the gaming balls. The gaming balls that have won the winning openings 9029, 9030, 9033, and 9039 are detected by the winning opening switches 9029a, 9030a, 9033a, and 9039a.

On the right side of the game board 906, a normal symbol display 9010 is provided. The normal symbol display 9010 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information called normal symbols (for example, "○" and "x").

When the game ball passes through the gate 9032 and is detected by the gate switch 9032a, the variable display of the display on the normal symbol display 9010 is started. In this embodiment, the upper and lower lamps (the pattern becomes visible when turned on) are alternately turned on to perform variable display. For example, if the lower lamp is turned on at the end of variable display, it is a win. . And when the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 9010 is a predetermined symbol (hit symbol), the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time. That is, the state of the variable winning ball device 9015 is an advantageous state from a disadvantageous state to the player (a state where the game ball can be won in the second start winning port 9014) when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol. Changes to. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display device 9010, a normal symbol hold storage display device 9041 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 9032 is provided. Every time there is a passage of the game ball to the gate 9032, that is, every time the game ball is detected by the gate switch 9032a, the normal symbol reservation storage display 9041 increments the LED to be turned on by one. Then, every time the variable display of the normal symbol display device 9010 is started, the number of LEDs to be turned on is reduced by 1. Furthermore, compared to the normal state, the probability of being decided to be a big hit is a high probability state (compared to the normal state, a state in which the probability of being judged as a big hit as a variation display result of a special symbol is increased. In the high probability state.), the probability that the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 9010 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening the variable winning ball device 9015 are increased.

Around the left and right of the game area 907 of the game board 906, there are provided decorative LEDs 9025 which are displayed blinking during the game, and at the bottom there is an outlet 9026 for taking in a hit ball which has not been won. Further, two speakers 9027 for producing a sound effect or a sound as a predetermined sound output are provided on the upper left and right sides outside the game area 907. A frame LED 9028 provided on the front frame is provided on the outer periphery of the game area 907.

An operation button 90120 as an operation means that can be operated by the player is provided in a member forming the hit ball supply plate 903. The operation button 90120 is provided with a push button switch that can be pressed by the player. Note that the operation button 90120 is provided with not only a push button switch that can be pressed by the player, but also a dial that can be rotated by the player. The player can make a predetermined selection (for example, selection of effects) by rotating the dial.

The game machine drives a drive motor in response to a player operating a ball operation handle 905, and uses a rotational force of the drive motor to shoot a game ball into a game area 907 (not shown). ) Is provided. The game ball shot from the hitting ball launching device enters the game area 907 through a hit ball rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 907, and then descends from the game area 907. When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening 9013 and is detected by the first starting opening switch 9013a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, the first 1 start condition is established), the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started in the first special symbol display 908a, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started in the effect display device 909. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the first starting winning opening 9013. Unless the variable display of the first special symbol can be started, the first reserved storage number is increased by 1 on condition that the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 9014 and is detected by the second starting opening switch 9014a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, the first 2 start condition is satisfied), the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started on the second special symbol display device 908b, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started on the effect display device 909. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the second start winning port 9014. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second reserved storage number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

In this embodiment, in the case of a probability variation big hit, after being transferred to the so-called probability variation state after the big hit game is finished, the game state is shifted to a high probability state, and the game ball is easy to start winning (that is, a special symbol). The execution condition of the variable display on the display devices 908a and 908b and the effect display device 909 is easily established). In the high base state, for example, the frequency of the variable winning ball apparatus 9015 being in the open state is increased, or the time when the variable winning ball apparatus 9015 is in the open state is longer than in the case of not being in the high base state. It will be easier to win the starting prize.

Note that the variable winning ball device 9015 does not extend the time for which it is in an open state (also referred to as an open extension state), but shifts to a normal symbol probability changing state in which the probability that a stop symbol on the normal symbol display 9010 is a winning symbol is increased. Therefore, the high base state may be set. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 9010 becomes a predetermined symbol (hit symbol), the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time. In this case, by controlling the transition to the normal symbol probability changing state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 9010 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the frequency of the variable winning ball device 9015 being in the open state is increased. Therefore, if the state shifts to the normal symbol probability changing state, the opening time and the number of times of opening the variable winning ball device 9015 are increased, and it becomes a state (high base state) in which it is easy to start winning. That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening the variable winning ball device 9015 are increased when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol or the stop symbol of the special symbol is a probability variation symbol, and the like, which is disadvantageous to the player. It changes to an advantageous state (a state in which it is easy to start winning). In addition, increasing the number of times of opening is a concept including changing from a closed state to an open state.

Further, by shifting to the normal symbol time saving state in which the variation time (variable display period) of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 9010 is shortened, the high base state may be shifted. In the normal symbol time saving state, since the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened, the frequency of the variation of the normal symbol is increased, and as a result, the frequency of winning the normal symbol is increased. Therefore, since the frequency of winning the normal symbol is high, the frequency of the variable winning ball device 9015 is high, and the starting winning is easy (high base state).

Further, in this embodiment, when shifting to the high base state, it is also shifted to a time saving state (special symbol saving time state) in which the variation time (variable display period) of the special symbol or the effect symbol is shortened. By shifting to such a time saving state, the variation time of the special symbol or the effect symbol is shortened, so the frequency of the variation of the special symbol or the effect symbol is increased (in other words, the storage of the reserved memory is exhausted. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the situation in which an invalid start winning occurs. Therefore, an effective starting winning is likely to occur, and as a result, the possibility of playing a big hit game is increased.

Furthermore, by shifting to all the states shown above (open extension state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol time saving state and special symbol time saving state), it becomes easier to start winning (transfer to high base state) May be. Also, by shifting to any one of the states shown above (open extension state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol time saving state and special symbol time saving state), it becomes easier to start winning (high base State). In addition, by shifting to only one of the above-mentioned states (open extension state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol time saving state and special symbol time saving state), it is easy to start winning. It is also possible to set).

FIG. 27 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 9031. Note that FIG. 27 also shows the payout control board 9037, the effect control board 9080, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 90560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 901 according to a program is mounted on the main board 9031. The game control microcomputer 90560 includes a ROM 9054 for storing programs for game control (game progress control), a RAM 9055 as a storage unit used as a work memory, a CPU 9056 for performing control operations according to the programs, and an I/O port unit 9057. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 9054 and the RAM 9055 are built in the game control microcomputer 90560. That is, the game control microcomputer 90560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The 1-chip microcomputer has at least the RAM 9055 in addition to the CPU 9056, and the ROM 9054 may be external or internal. The I/O port unit 9057 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 90560 further includes a random number circuit 9053 that generates a hardware random number (random number generated by a hardware circuit). Further, the game control microcomputer 90560 also has a built-in serial communication circuit 9051.

Further, the RAM 9055 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, a part or all of which is backed up by a backup power supply created in the power supply board 90910. That is, even if the power supply to the game machine is stopped, a part or all of the content of the RAM 9055 is saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot supply power). In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as a special symbol process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like. Further, data according to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 9055 is backed up by power supply.

In the game control microcomputer 90560, the CPU 9056 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 9054, and hence the game control microcomputer 90560 (or CPU 9056) executes (or performs processing). Specifically, the CPU 9056 executes control according to a program. This also applies to the microcomputers mounted on other boards than the main board 9031.

The random number circuit 9053 is a hardware circuit used to generate a random number for determination for determining whether or not to make a big hit based on the display result of the variable display of the special symbol. The random number circuit 9053 updates the numerical data according to the set update rule within the numerical range in which the initial value (for example, 0) and the upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and the start occurs at random timing. Based on that the time of winning is the time of reading (extracting) the numerical data, the numerical data read has a random number generating function.

The random number circuit 9053 includes a selection setting function of an update range of numerical data (initial value selection setting function and upper limit selection setting function), a numerical data update rule selection setting function, and a numerical data update rule selection. It has various functions such as a switching function. With such a function, the randomness of the generated random numbers can be improved.

Further, the game control microcomputer 90560 has a function of setting an initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 9053. For example, a predetermined calculation is performed using an ID number of the game control microcomputer 90560 (an ID number assigned with a different numerical value for each product of the game control microcomputer 90560) stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 9054. The numerical data thus obtained is set as the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 9053. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random numbers generated by the random number circuit 9053 can be further improved.

The serial communication circuit 9051 has a function of converting an effect control command into a serial signal and transmitting the serial signal to the effect control microcomputer 90100 mounted on the effect control board 9080 by a serial communication method.

In addition, an input driver circuit 9058 for providing the game control microcomputer 90560 with detection signals from the gate switch 9032a, the starting opening switch 9013a, the count switch 9023, and the winning opening switches 9029a, 9030a, 9033a, 9039a is also mounted on the main board 9031. There is. Further, the output circuit 9059 which drives the solenoid 9016 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 9015 and the solenoid 9021 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 9020 forming the special winning opening in accordance with a command from the game controlling microcomputer 90560. It is mounted on the 9031.

Further, the game control microcomputer 90560, the first special symbol display 908a, the second special symbol display 908b, which variably displays the special symbol, the normal symbol display 9010, which variably displays the normal symbol, the first special symbol reservation storage Display control of the display 9018a, the second special symbol reservation storage display 9018b and the normal symbol reservation storage display 9041 is performed.

An information output circuit (not shown) that outputs an information output signal such as big hit information indicating occurrence of a big hit game state to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 9031.

In this embodiment, the effect control means (composed of effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 9080 uses the serial communication method to instruct effect contents from the game control microcomputer 90560. The control command is received, and display control of the effect display device 909 that variably displays effect symbols is performed.

In addition, the production control means mounted on the production control board 9080 controls the display of the decorative LED 9025 provided on the game board and the frame LED 9028 provided on the frame side via the lamp driver board 9035. The sound output from the speaker 9027 is controlled via the audio output board 9070.

FIG. 28 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the effect control board 9080, the lamp driver board 9035, and the audio output board 9070. Note that in the example shown in FIG. 28, the lamp driver board 9035 and the audio output board 9070 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but a microcomputer may be installed. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 9035 and the audio output board 9070, only the effect control board 9080 may be provided for effect control.

The effect control board 9080 is equipped with an effect control CPU 90101 and an effect control microcomputer 90100 including a built-in RAM that stores information about effects such as effect symbol process flags. The RAM may be external. In this embodiment, the RAM in the effect control microcomputer 90100 is not backed up by power supply. In the effect control board 9080, the effect control CPU 90101 operates according to the program stored in the built-in ROM, and receives the effect control command using the serial communication circuit (see FIG. 47). Further, the effect control CPU 90101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 90109 to perform display control of the effect display device 909 based on the effect control command. Further, the effect control board 9080 is equipped with an external SDRAM 90116. The built-in ROM and built-in RAM of the effect control microcomputer 90100 and the external SDRAM 90116 will be described later.

In this embodiment, a VDP 90109 that controls the display of the effect display device 909 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 90100 is mounted on the effect control board 9080. The VDP 90109 has an address space independent of the effect control microcomputer 90100, and maps the VRAM therein. VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data. Then, the VDP 90109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 909 via the frame memory.

The effect control CPU 90101 outputs to the VDP 90109 a command for reading necessary data from a CGROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The CGROM stores in advance character image data and moving image data displayed on the effect display device 909, specifically, people, characters, figures and symbols (including effect patterns), and background image data. ROM for this. The VDP 90109 reads the image data from the CGROM according to the instruction from the effect control CPU 90101. Then, the VDP 90109 executes display control based on the read image data.

Also, the effect control CPU 90101 drives the motor 9086 to operate the movable member 9078 via the output port 90106. Further, the effect control CPU 90101 drives a motor 9087 for operating the effect blade accessory 9079a, 9079b via the output port 90106.

In addition, the effect control CPU 90101 inputs a signal from the operation button 90120 via the input port 90107 in response to a pressing operation of the operation button 90120 by the player.

Further, the effect control CPU 90101 outputs a signal for driving an LED or a lamp to the lamp driver board 9035 via the output port 90105. Further, the effect control CPU 90101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 9070 via the output port 90104.

In the lamp driver board 9035, signals for driving LEDs and lamps are input to the LED driver 90352 via the input driver 90351. The LED driver 90352 supplies a current to a light emitting body provided on the frame side such as the frame LED 9028 based on a signal for driving the LED. In addition, electric current is supplied to the decorative LED 9025 and the like provided on the game board side.

In the voice output board 9070, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 90703 via the input driver 90702. The voice synthesis IC 90703 generates a voice or a sound effect corresponding to the sound number data and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 90705. The amplifier circuit 90705 amplifies the output level of the voice synthesizing IC 90703 to a level according to the volume set in the volume 90706 and outputs the audio signal to the speaker 9027. The voice data ROM 90704 stores control data according to the sound number data. The control data according to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating the output mode of the sound effect or the sound in a predetermined period (for example, the variation period of the effect symbol) in time series.

Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing the main processing executed by the game control microcomputer 90560 on the main board 9031. When power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, and the gaming control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, CPU 9056) After the security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, the main process after step S901 is started. In the main process, the CPU 9056 first makes necessary initial settings.

In the initial setting process, the CPU 9056 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S901). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step S902), and the stack pointer designated address is set to the stack pointer (step S903). After initialization of the built-in device (initialization of the CTC (counter/timer) and PIO (parallel input/output port) which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) (step S904), the RAM can be accessed. Is set (step S905). In the interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 9056 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output by the built-in device is This is a mode indicating an interrupt address.

Next, the CPU 9056 confirms the state of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input through the input port (step S906). If the CPU 9056 detects ON in the confirmation, the CPU 9056 executes a normal initialization process (steps S9010 to S9015).

If the clear switch is not turned on, check whether the data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, processing when power supply is stopped such as addition of parity data) is performed when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. Yes (step S907). If it is confirmed that such protection processing is not performed, the CPU 9056 executes initialization processing. Whether or not there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed, for example, by the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area during the power supply stop process.

After confirming that the power supply stop process has been performed, the CPU 9056 checks the data in the backup RAM area (step S908). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S908, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power is restored after an unexpected power failure such as a power failure, the data in the backup RAM area should have been saved, so the check result (comparison result) becomes normal (match). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply was stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, the initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on, not when the power supply is restored from the stop, is executed.

If the check result is normal, the CPU 9056 causes the game state recovery process (steps S9041 to S9043) for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electric component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply was stopped. Processing). Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 9054 is set to the pointer (step S9041), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set to the work area (area in the RAM 9055) (step S9042). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power supply. Initialized data is set in the backup setting table for the areas that may be initialized in the work area. As a result of the processing in steps S9041 and S9042, the stored contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain. The part that should not be initialized is, for example, data indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, time saving flag, etc.), the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer ), a portion in which data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set.

Further, the CPU 9056 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S9043). Further, the CPU 9056 transmits a display result designation command designating a display result (normal big hit, probability variation big hit, sudden variation big hit, small hit, or out) to the effect control board 9080 (step. S9044). Then, the process proceeds to step S9014. In addition, in step S9044, the CPU 9056 also transmits the first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command (see FIG. 33), for example, when the value of the special symbol pointer described later is also stored in the backup RAM. You may do so. In this case, the production control microcomputer 90100 may restart the variable display of the fourth symbol based on the reception of the first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command.

In this embodiment, the backup RAM area also stores the value of the variable time timer described later. Therefore, when the power failure is restored, after the display result designation command is transmitted in step S9044, the measurement of the value of the variable time timer that has been saved is restarted and the variable display of the special symbol is restarted and saved. When the value of the variable time timer that has been used has timed out, a symbol confirmation designation command to be described later is transmitted. Further, in this embodiment, the value of a special symbol process flag described later is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power failure is restored, the special symbol process process is restarted from the process corresponding to the value of the special symbol process flag that is saved.

It should be noted that the CPU 9056 may first check whether or not the value of the variable time timer stored in the backup RAM area is 0, instead of always transmitting the display result designation command when the power is restored. . If the value of the variable time timer is not 0, it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the change, and a display result designation command is transmitted. It may be determined that the state has not been reached and the display result designation command may not be transmitted.

Further, the CPU 9056 may first check whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag stored in the backup RAM area is 3. Then, if the value of the special symbol process flag is 3, it is determined that there is a power outage during fluctuation, and the display result designation command is transmitted. If the special symbol process flag is not 3, it fluctuates during a power failure. It may be determined that the display result designation command has not been received and the display result designation command may not be transmitted.

In this embodiment, both the backup flag and the check data are used to check whether the data in the backup RAM area is stored, but only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as a trigger for executing the game state recovery process.

In the initialization process, the CPU 9056 first performs a RAM clear process (step S9010). By the RAM clearing process, predetermined data (for example, the data of the count value of the counter for generating the random number for normal symbol determination) is initialized to 0, but an arbitrary value or a predetermined value It may be initialized to. Further, the predetermined area (for example, the data of the count value of the counter for generating the normal symbol per determination random number) may be left as it is without initializing the entire area of the RAM 9055. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 9054 is set to the pointer (step S9011), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set to the work area (step S9012).

By the processing of steps S9011 and S9012, for example, a normal symbol per determination random number counter, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, etc. Initially set to a flag for selectively performing processing according to the control state. The value is set.

Further, the CPU 9056 is an initialization designation command (a command indicating that the game control microcomputer 90560 has executed the initialization process) for initializing a sub-board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 9031 is mounted). Is sent to the sub-board (step S9013). For example, when the effect control microcomputer 90100 receives the initialization designation command, the effect display device 909 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized, that is, performs initialization notification.

Further, the CPU 9056 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 9053 (step S9014). The CPU 9056 makes settings for causing the random number circuit 9053 to update the value of the random R′, for example, by executing processing according to the random number circuit setting program.

Then, in step S9015, the CPU 9056 sets the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 90560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically taken at predetermined time intervals (for example, 4 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 4 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is taken every 4 ms.

When the execution of the initialization process (steps S9010 to S9015) is completed, the CPU 9056 repeatedly executes the display random number updating process (step S9017) and the initial value random number updating process (step S9018) in the main process. When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are executed, the interrupt prohibited state is set (step S9016), and when the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are completed, the interrupt permitted state is set. It is set (step S9019). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when the big hit is not made, and a random number for determining whether or not the reach is made when the big hit is not made. The random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random numbers. In this embodiment, the random number for the initial value is the initial value of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for deciding whether or not to win the normal symbol (normal symbol per-determination random number generation counter). It is a random number for determining. A game control process for controlling the progress of a game to be described later (the game control microcomputer 90560 controls the game display device, the variable winning ball device, the ball payout device, and other game devices provided in the game machine by itself. In the process of, or the process of transmitting a command signal to control other microcomputer, also referred to as the game device control process), the count value of the random number per ordinary symbol is one round (normal random number for per symbol determination) When the number of numerical values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible values has been increased), the initial value is set to the counter.

In this embodiment, the reach effect is executed using effect symbols variably displayed on the effect display device 909. Further, when the display result of the special symbol is a big hit symbol, the reach effect is always executed (however, in the case of the sudden probability jackpot, the reach does not occur and the sudden probability jackpot symbol (eg, "135") is not reached. May be displayed as a stop). When the display result of the special symbol is not a big hit symbol, the game control microcomputer 90560 determines whether or not the reach effect is executed by performing a lottery for determining the variation pattern type and the variation pattern using random numbers. To do. However, it is the production control microcomputer 90100 that actually executes the reach production control.

When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 9056 executes the timer interrupt process of steps S9020 to S9034 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process is executed to detect whether a power-off signal has been output (whether or not the power-on signal has been turned on) (step S9020). The power-off signal is output, for example, when the power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a decrease in the voltage of the power supply supplied to the gaming machine. Then, in the power-off detection process, when the CPU 9056 detects that the power-off signal has been output, the CPU 9056 executes a power-supply-stop-time process for saving necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, the detection signals of the gate switch 9032a, the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, and the count switch 9023 are input through the input driver circuit 9058, and the state determination thereof is performed (switch process: step S9021). ).

Next, the CPU 9056 is the first special symbol display device 908a, the second special symbol display device 908b, the normal symbol display device 9010, the first special symbol hold storage display device 9018a, the second special symbol hold storage display device 9018b, the normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the pending storage display 9041 is executed (step S9022). Regarding the first special symbol display device 908a, the second special symbol display device 908b and the normal symbol display device 9010, a drive signal is output to each display device according to the contents of the output buffer set in steps S9032 and S9033. Execute control.

In addition, a process for updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a normal symbol per determination random number used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S9023). The CPU 9056 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S9024 and S9025).

Further, the CPU 9056 performs special symbol process processing (step S9026). In the special symbol process process, the first special symbol display device 908a, the second special symbol display device 908b and the special symbol process flag for controlling the special winning opening in a predetermined order are executed according to the corresponding process. CPU9056 updates the value of the special symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

Next, normal symbol process processing is performed (step S9027). In the normal symbol process process, the CPU 9056 executes the corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 9010 in a predetermined order. The CPU 9056 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag according to the gaming state. In the normal symbol process process of step S9027, the variable display of the normal symbol is executed based on the detection of the passage of the game ball to the gate 9032, and the variable display result is derived and displayed, or the variable display result of the normal symbol is displayed. When is hit, a process of controlling the variable winning ball device 9015 to an open state or a closed state is executed.

Further, the CPU 9056 performs a process of sending a production control command to the production control microcomputer 90100 (production control command control process: step S9028).

Further, the CPU 9056 performs information output processing for outputting data such as big hit information, start information, and probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer (step S9029).

Further, the CPU 9056 executes prize ball processing such as setting the number of prize balls based on the detection signals of the first starting port switch 9013a, the second starting port switch 9014a and the count switch 9023 (step S9030). Specifically, the payout control micro controller mounted on the payout control board 9037 according to the winning detection based on that any one of the first start opening switch 9013a, the second start opening switch 9014a and the count switch 9023 is turned on. A payout control command (award ball number signal) indicating the number of award balls is output to the computer. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 9097 in response to a payout control command indicating the number of prize balls.

In this embodiment, the RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. However, the CPU 9056 is concerned with turning on/off the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The content is output to the output port (step S9031: output process).

Further, the CPU 9056 performs a special symbol display control process of setting special symbol display control data for performing a special symbol effect display according to the value of the special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data ( Step S9032).

Further, the CPU 9056 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting the normal symbol display control data for performing the normal symbol effect display according to the value of the normal symbol process flag in the output buffer for the normal symbol display control data setting ( Step S9033). CPU9056, for example, until the end flag is set when the start flag related to the fluctuation of the normal symbol is set, the fluctuation speed of the normal symbol is switched between the display states (“○” and “x”) every 0.2 seconds. At such a speed, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer (for example, 1 indicating “◯” and 0 indicating “x”) is switched every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 9056 outputs the drive signal in step S9022 in accordance with the display control data set in the output buffer to execute the effect display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 9010.

After that, the interrupt permission state is set (step S9034), and the process ends.

By the above control, in this embodiment, the game control processing is activated every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the process of steps S9021 to S9033 (excluding step S9029) in the timer interrupt process. Further, in this embodiment, the game control process is executed in the timer interrupt process, but in the timer interrupt process, for example, only the flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is the main process. May be executed in.

If the first special symbol display device 908a or the second special symbol display device 908b and the effect display device 909 displaces the stop symbol, the variable display state of the effect symbol is started after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. A predetermined combination of effect symbols that does not reach may be stopped and displayed without reaching the reach state. Such a variable display mode of the effect symbol is referred to as a variable display mode of "non-reach" (also referred to as "normal loss") in the case where the variable display result is an outlier pattern.

If the first special symbol display device 908a or the second special symbol display device 908b and the effect display device 909 displaces the stop symbol, the variable display state of the effect symbol is changed after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. The reach effect may be executed after the reach state is reached, and a predetermined combination of effect symbols that does not become the big hit symbol may be stopped and displayed. The variable display result of such effect symbols is referred to as a variable display mode of "reach" (also referred to as "reach loss") when the variable display result is "off".

In this embodiment, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 908a or the second special symbol display device 908b, the reach effect is executed after the variable display state of the effect symbol becomes the reach state. Finally, the production symbols are finally stopped and displayed in the respective symbol display areas 909L, 909C, and 909R of "left", "middle", and "right" in the production display device 909 (however, in the case of sudden probability big hit). In some cases, sudden change jackpot pattern (for example, "135") may be stopped and displayed without reaching.

When "5", which is a small hit, is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 908a or the second special symbol display device 908b, in the effect display device 909, the variable display mode of the effect symbol is "a sudden sudden change big hit". After the variable display of the effect symbol is performed as in the case of, the predetermined small hit symbol (the same symbol as the sudden probability big hit symbol. For example, "135") may be stopped and displayed. The display effect on the effect display device 909 corresponding to the small hit symbol "5" being stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 908a or the second special symbol display device 908b is referred to as the "small hit" variable display mode. .

Here, the small hit is a hit that is allowed up to the number of times of opening the special winning opening is smaller than that of the big hit (in this embodiment, the opening for 0.1 seconds is twice). When the small hit game is over, the game state does not change. That is, the probability change state does not shift to the normal state and the normal state does not shift to the probability change state. Further, the sudden probability sudden big hit is allowed up to a small number of times the big winning opening is opened in the big hit game state (two times for 0.1 second in this embodiment), but the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely large. It is a short big hit, and it is a big hit that shifts the game state after the big hit game to the probability variation state (that is, by doing so, it looks to the player as if it suddenly changed to the probability variation state. Is). That is, in this embodiment, the sudden winning big hit and the small hit have the same opening pattern of the special winning opening. By controlling in this way, when the special winning opening is opened twice for 0.1 seconds, it is impossible to recognize whether it is a sudden change big hit or a small hit, so a high probability state for the player. (Probably changed state) can be expected, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

When the gaming machine is configured such that all types of big hits are probability-change big hits, it is not necessary to provide a small hit. Also, when the big hit types are all probability varying big hits, if a small hit is provided, a sudden probability big hit without transition to a probability changing state (high probability state) and a time-saving state (high base state) Is preferably provided.

FIG. 31 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1'(MR1'): The type of big hit (normal big hit, probability variation big hit, sudden probability variation big hit described later) is determined (for big hit type determination)
(2) Random 2'(MR2'): Determines the type (type) of variation pattern (for variation pattern type determination)
(3) Random 3'(MR3'): Determine the variation pattern (variation time) (for variation pattern determination)
(4) Random 4'(MR4'): Determine whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination)
(5) Random 5'(MR5'): Determine the initial value of random 4'(for determining random 4'initial value)

In this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is first determined by using the fluctuation pattern type determination random number (random 2′) and then determined by using the fluctuation pattern determination random number (random 3′). Any of the fluctuation patterns included in the fluctuation pattern type is determined. As such, in this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by the two-stage lottery process.

The variation pattern type is a group of a plurality of variation patterns grouped according to the characteristics of the variation mode. For example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by the type of reach, and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach A, and a variation pattern with super reach B are included. It may be divided into fluctuation pattern types. Further, for example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by the number of times of re-variation of pseudo-relation, and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern without pseudo-reaction, a variation pattern type including one variation pattern, and It may be divided into a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern of two fluctuations and a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern of three fluctuations again. Further, for example, a plurality of variation patterns may be grouped according to the presence/absence of effects such as pseudo-relations and slip effects.

In step S9023 in the game control processing shown in FIG. 30, the game control microcomputer 90560 is a counter for generating the random number for jackpot type determination (1) and the random number for normal symbol determination (4). Count up (add 1). That is, they are the judgment random numbers, and the other random numbers are the display random numbers (random 2', random 3') or the initial value random numbers (random 5'). Note that random numbers other than the above random numbers may be used to enhance the game effect. In addition, in this embodiment, a random number generated by hardware built in the game control microcomputer 90560 (or hardware external to the game control microcomputer 90560) may be used as the big hit determination random number. As the big hit determination random number, a software random number may be used instead of a hardware random number.

FIG. 32A is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit determination table. The big hit determination table is a set of data stored in the ROM 9054, and is a table in which a big hit determination value to be compared with the random R′ is set. The big hit determination table includes a normal big hit determination table used in a normal state (a game state that is not the probability changed state) and a probability variation time big hit determination table used in the probability changed state. The numerical values described in the left column of FIG. 32(A) are set in the normal time jackpot determination table, and the numerical values described in the right column of FIG. 32(A) are set in the probability variation jackpot determination table. Is set. The numerical value described in FIG. 32(A) is a jackpot determination value.

32B and 32C are explanatory diagrams showing the small hit determination table. The small hit determination table is a set of data stored in the ROM 9054, and is a table in which a small hit determination value to be compared with the random R'is set. The small hit determination table, the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) used when performing the variable display of the first special symbol, and the small hit determination table used when performing the variable display of the second special symbol There is (for the second special symbol). In the small hitting determination table (for the first special symbol), each numerical value described in FIG. 32(B) is set, and in the small hitting determination table (for the second special symbol), FIG. 32(C). Each listed numerical value is set. The numerical values shown in FIGS. 32(B) and 32(C) are small hit determination values.

The small hit may be determined only when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and the small hit may not be provided when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. In this case, the small hit determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 32(C) may not be provided. In this embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed when the game state is shifted to the probability changing state. Even if the gaming state is shifted to the probability changing state, a small hit occurs so that if the configuration is made to inspire whether or not the probability changes, the current gaming state is the probability changing state. On the contrary, it makes the player feel annoyed. Therefore, if the small hit does not occur during the variable display of the second special symbol, the small hit is less likely to occur when the game state is the positive change state, and the stirrer production against the positive change is not performed more than necessary. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player feels troublesome.

The CPU 9056 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 9053 at a predetermined time and uses the extracted value as the value of the big hit determination random number (random R′). The big hit determination random number value is shown in FIG. When any of the jackpot determination values shown is matched, it is determined to be a jackpot (a normal jackpot, a probability variation jackpot, and a sudden variation jackpot described later) for the special symbol. Also, when the big hit determination random number value matches any of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 32B and 32C, it is determined to make a small hit for the special symbol. The “probability” shown in FIG. 32(A) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 32(B) and 32(C) indicates the probability (ratio) of a small hit. Also, to determine whether to make a big hit, it is to make a decision to move to the big hit gaming state, the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot design. Also, to determine whether to make a small hit, it is to determine whether to shift to the small hit game state, stop in the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b It is also to decide whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 32(B) and 32(C), when the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) is used, the small hit is determined at a rate of 1/300. On the other hand, when the small hit determination table (second special symbol) is used, the case where the small hit is determined at a rate of 1/3000 will be described. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the start winning a prize is given to the first starting winning opening 9013 and the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the starting winning is given to the second starting winning a prize opening 9014 and the second special symbol is displayed. Compared to the case where the variable display is executed, the proportion of the “small hit” is determined to be high.

32D and 32E are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination tables 90131a and 90131b stored in the ROM 9054. Of these, FIG. 32(D) determines the jackpot type by using the pending storage based on the fact that the game ball has won the first starting winning opening 9013 (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). It is a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) 90131a in the case. In addition, FIG. 32(E) is a case where the big hit type is determined by using the pending storage based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting winning opening 9014 (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed). It is a big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) 90131b.

The jackpot type determination tables 90131a and 90131b, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern, the jackpot type is "normal jackpot" based on a random number (random 1') for jackpot type determination, It is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of the "probability variation jackpot" and the "probability variation jackpot". Note that in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 32D and 32E, the jackpot type determination table 90131a is assigned eight determination values for “sudden probability big hit” (40 minutes. 8 is determined to be a sudden probability big jackpot), whereas the jackpot type determination table 90131b is assigned two determination values for “a sudden probability big jackpot” (ratio 2/40). Suddenly decided as a sudden change jackpot in)) Explain the case. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the start winning a prize is given to the first starting winning opening 9013 and the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the starting winning is given to the second starting winning a prize opening 9014 and the second special symbol is displayed. Compared with the case where the variable display is executed, the rate of being determined as “a sudden probability big hit” is high. It should be noted that the "sudden probability sudden big hit" is distributed only to the jackpot type determination table 90131a for the first special symbol, and the "sudden probability large jackpot" is not distributed to the jackpot type determination table 90131b for the second special symbol (that is, , The "special sudden change big hit" may be determined only when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed).

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 32(D) and 32(E), as a first specific game state in which a predetermined amount of game value is given, a sudden probability variation jackpot (two rounds jackpot) and the game. There is a case where it is determined to be a normal jackpot and a probability variation jackpot (15 round jackpot) as the second specific game state in which a game value of a larger amount than the value is given, and when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed Although the case of deciding to be the first specific game state at a high rate is shown, the game value to be given is not limited to the number of rounds as shown in this embodiment. For example, as compared with the first specific game state, the second specific game state in which the permissible amount of the winning number (count number) of the game balls to the big winning opening per round is increased as the game value is determined. Good. Further, for example, as compared with the first specific game state, the second specific game state in which the opening time of the special winning opening per one big hit during the big hit is extended may be determined. Further, for example, even in the case of the same 15 round big hit, the first specific game state in which the special winning opening is opened once per round and the second specific game state in which the special winning opening is opened plural times per round It is possible to prepare and increase the game value in the second specific game state by substantially increasing the number of times the special winning opening is opened. In this case, for example, in either the case of the first specific game state or the second specific game state, when the special winning opening is opened 15 times (in this case, all 15 rounds in the case of the first specific game state) May be ended, and in the case of the second specific game state, the undigested round remains), and an effect may be executed in a manner that fuels whether or not the big hit continues. Then, in the case of the first specific game state, since all 15 rounds have been internally ended, the jackpot game is ended, and in the case of the second specific game state, the undigested round remains internally. Therefore, the jackpot game may be continued (an effect in which the jackpot opening is additionally started by a bonus after finishing the jackpot opening 15 times).

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 32D and 32E, the types of big hits include “normal big hit”, “probably odd big hit” and “suddenly sudden big hit”. In this embodiment, the number of rounds executed in the big hit game is two types, 15 rounds and 2 rounds, but the number of rounds executed in the big hit game is shown in this embodiment. It's not limited to For example, a 7R certainty variation jackpot for controlling a seven-round jackpot game and a 5R certainty variation jackpot for controlling a five-round jackpot game may be provided. Further, in the present embodiment, there are three types of big hit types, namely, “normal big hit”, “probability change big hit”, and “sudden probability change big hit”. A jackpot type may be provided. On the contrary, the number of types of big hits may be less than three, and for example, only two types of big hits may be provided.

The "normal big hit" is a big hit that is controlled to a big hit game state of 15 rounds and shifts to a time saving state (high base state) after the end of the big hit game state (see steps S90167 and 90168 described later). After shifting to the time saving state, when the variable display is completed 100 times, the time saving state ends (see steps S90168 and S90137 to 90140 described later). In the present embodiment, the time saving state is also ended when a big hit occurs after the shift to the time saving state and before the execution of the variable display 100 times is ended (see step S90132 described later).

The "probable variation big hit" is a big jackpot which is controlled to a big hit game state of 15 rounds and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) after the termination of the big hit game state (in the present embodiment, it is shifted to the probability variation state). The time saving state (high base state) is also entered (see steps S90169 and S90170 to be described later). After the transition to the probability variation state, the probability variation state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see step S90132 described later).

Further, the "sudden probability big hit" is allowed up to the number of times of opening the special winning opening is smaller than that of "normal big hit" or "probability big hit" (in this embodiment, opening for 0.1 second is twice). It is a big hit. That is, in the case of "a sudden sudden change big hit", the big hit game state of two rounds is controlled. In addition, the opening time of the special winning opening per round is as long as 29 seconds in the "normal big hit" and "probability variation big hit", whereas the opening time of the big winning opening per round in "sudden probability variation big hit" It is extremely short at 0.1 seconds, and it can hardly be expected that a game ball will win the big winning opening during a big hit game. Then, in this embodiment, after the sudden probability big hit game state is suddenly transitioned to the probability variation state (high probability state) (in this embodiment, the probability variation state is shifted to the time saving state (high base state). (See steps S90169 and S90170 described later). After the transition to the probability variation state, the probability variation state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see step S90132 described later).

As described above, in the present embodiment, even when a "small hit" occurs, the special winning opening is opened twice for 0.1 seconds each, which leads to a big hit game state due to "a sudden probability big hit". Similar control is performed. Then, in the case of "small hit", the game state does not change after the opening of the special winning opening twice, and the game state before the "small hit" is maintained. By doing so, it becomes impossible to recognize whether it is a "sudden variation big hit" or a "small hit", and the enjoyment of the game is improved.

The jackpot type determination tables 90131a and 90131b have numerical values that are compared with the value of the random 1', and the determination values (the jackpot type determination that correspond to each of the "normal jackpot", "probability variation jackpot", and "sudden probability variation jackpot" Value) is set. When the value of Random 1′ matches any of the jackpot type determination values, the CPU 9056 determines the type of the jackpot as the type corresponding to the matched jackpot type determination value.

33 and 34 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 90560. In the example shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, the command 80XX(H) is an effect control command (fluctuation pattern command) that specifies the variation pattern of the effect symbol that is variably displayed on the effect display device 909 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol. ) (Each corresponding to the variation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is given to each of the fluctuation patterns that can be used, there is a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to each of the fluctuation patterns specified by the number. In addition, "(H)" indicates that it is a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the variation start. Therefore, when the effect control microcomputer 90100 receives the command 80XX(H), it controls the effect display device 909 to start variable display of effect symbols.

Commands 8C01(H) to 8C05(H) are effect control commands indicating whether to make a big hit, whether to make a small hit, and a big hit type. Since the effect control microcomputer 90100 determines the display result of the effect design according to the reception of the commands 8C01(H) to 8C05(H), the commands 8C01(H) to 8C05(H) are referred to as display result designation commands.

Command 8D01 (H) is a production control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. Command 8D02 (H) is a production control command (second symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol identification command (or symbol variation designation command). The variable pattern command may include information indicating whether to start the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol.

Command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the variable display (variation) of the fourth symbol is ended and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When the effect control microcomputer 90100 receives the symbol confirmation designation command, the variable display (fluctuation) of the fourth symbol is ended and the display result is derived and displayed.

The command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is restarted. The gaming control microcomputer 90560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command when data is stored in the backup RAM when power supply to the gaming machine is started, and otherwise, initialization designation Send a command.

The command 9F00(H) is a production control command (customer waiting demo designation command) that specifies a customer waiting demonstration.

The commands A001 to A003 (H) are display control commands (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command) for displaying the fanfare screen, that is, designating the start of the big hit game. In this embodiment, a big hit start 1 designation command, a big hit start 2 designation command, or a small hit/sudden-variable big hit start designation command is used according to the type of big hit. Specifically, the jackpot start 1 designation command (A001(H)) is used in the case of “normal jackpot”, and the jackpot start 2 designation command (A002(H)) is used in the case of “normal jackpot”. When it is a "sudden sudden change big hit" or "small hit", a small hit/sudden sudden change big hit start designation command (A003 (H)) is used. It should be noted that the game control microcomputer 90560 may be configured to send a fanfare designating command for suddenly changing a sudden big hit to specify a fanfare designating command in the case of a sudden big hit, but not to send a fanfare designating command in the case of a small hit. Good.

The command A1XX(H) is an effect control command (a special winning opening open designation command) indicating a display during opening of the special winning opening for the number (round) indicated by XX. Note that the special winning opening opening designation command is transmitted for each round with a value designating that round set in the EXT data, and therefore a different special winning opening opening designation command is transmitted for each round. For example, when executing the first round during the big hit game, a special winning opening open designation command (A101(H)) designating round 1 is transmitted, and when executing the tenth round during the big hit game. Sends a special winning opening open designation command (A10A(H)) designating round 10. A2XX(H) is an effect control command (designation command after opening the special winning opening) indicating the closing of the special winning opening for the number (round) indicated by XX. Since the special winning opening after-opening designation command is transmitted with the value designating that round being set in the EXT data for each round, a different special winning opening after-opening designation command is transmitted for each round. For example, when finishing the first round during the big hit game, a designation command (A201(H)) after opening the special winning opening designating round 1 is transmitted, and when finishing the tenth round during the big hit game. Sends a special winning opening open designation command (A30A(H)) designating round 10.

Command A301(H) is a production control command (big hit end 1 designation command: ending 1 designation command) for displaying the big hit end screen, that is, designating the end of the big hit game. The big hit end 1 designation command (A301 (H)) is used when the big hit game by "normal big hit" is ended. Command A302 (H) is a production control command (big hit end 2 designation command: ending 2 designation command) for displaying the big hit end screen, that is, designating the end of the big hit game. The jackpot end 2 designation command (A302(H)) is used when the jackpot game based on the "probably strange jackpot" is finished. The command A303 (H) is a production control command (small hit/suddenly odd big hit end designation command: ending 3 designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game or the sudden probability big hit game end. Incidentally, the game control microcomputer 90560 is configured so as to transmit an ending designation command for sudden variation big hit end designation when it is a sudden variation big hit, but does not transmit an ending designation command when it is a small hit. Good.

Command B000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state background designation command) that designates the background display when the game state is the normal state. The command B001 (H) is an effect control command (time saving state background specifying command) that specifies the background display when the game state is the time saving state. Command B002 (H) is a production control command (probability variation state background designation command) that designates the background display when the game state is the probability variation state.

Command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first reserved memory number addition designating command) that specifies that the first reserved memory number has increased by 1. Command C100 (H) is an effect control command (second reserved storage number addition designating command) that specifies that the second reserved storage number has increased by one. Command C200 (H) is an effect control command (first reserved memory number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the first reserved memory number has decreased by 1. Command C300 (H) is an effect control command (second reserved storage number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the second reserved storage number has decreased by 1.

In this embodiment, as the reserved storage information, for the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number, an effect control command (first reserved memory number addition designation) indicating that the reserved memory number has increased or decreased, respectively. Command, second reserved storage number addition designation command) is transmitted, but the form of the reserved storage information is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. The information may be transmitted.

(1) As the reserved storage information, only one command is transmitted, which one of the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory is increased in the one command is specified, and the increased number of reserved memories (First reserved memory number or second reserved memory number) may be set as EXT data and transmitted.

(2) As the reserved storage information, only one command is transmitted, and which one of the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory has increased in the one command is specified, and the total number of reserved memories is the EXT data. May be set and transmitted.

(3) As the reserved memory information, which one of the first start winning opening 9013 and the second starting winning opening 9014 has the starting winning prize (whether the first holding memory or the second holding memory has increased) is designated. The production control command (the first start winning award designation command, the second starting award designation command) is transmitted, and in addition to that, a reserved storage number designation command for designating the number of reserved storages is transmitted. The total number of pending storages may be set as EXT data and transmitted.

(4) As the reserved memory information, which one of the first starting winning opening 9013 and the second starting winning opening 9014 has the starting winning a prize (whether the first holding memory or the second holding memory has increased) is designated. The production control command (the first start winning award designation command, the second starting award designation command) is transmitted, and in addition to that, a reserved storage number designation command for designating the number of reserved storages is transmitted. The increased storage number (first storage number or second storage number) may be set as EXT data and transmitted.

The command C4XX(H) and the command C6XX(H) are effect control commands (winning time determination result designating command) indicating the contents of the winning determination result. Of these, the command C4XX (H) is a production control command (symbol design command) that indicates the result of determination of whether or not to be a big hit, whether or not to be a small hit, and a type of big hit among the determination results at the time of winning. is there. Further, the command C6XX(H) is an effect control command indicating a determination result (fluctuation pattern type determination result) of which determination value range the variation pattern type random number value is in the winning determination result. (Variable category command).

In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 90560 determines whether or not it is a big hit, whether or not it is a small hit, a big hit type, and a variation pattern type determination in a winning effect production process described later. It is determined which judgment value range the value of the random number for use falls within. Then, in the EXT data of the symbol designating command, a value designating a big hit or a small hit and a value designating the type of the big hit are set, and control is performed to transmit to the effect control microcomputer 90100. In addition, the EXT data of the variation category command is set to a value that specifies the range of the determination value as the determination result, and control is performed to transmit the value to the effect control microcomputer 90100. In this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 90100 can recognize whether or not the display result is a big hit or a small hit, and the type of the big hit, based on the value set in the symbol designating command. Based on the variation category command, the variation pattern type can be recognized when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number becomes a predetermined determination value.

The effect control microcomputer 90100 (specifically, effect control CPU 90101) mounted on the effect control board 9080 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 90560 installed on the main board 9031. Then, according to the contents shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, the display state of the image display device 909 is changed, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the voice output board 9070. To do.

For example, the game control microcomputer 90560 has a starting winning prize, and each time the variable display of the special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 908a or the second special symbol display device 908b, the variation pattern of the effect symbol is designated. The variation pattern command and the display result designation command are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90100.

In this embodiment, the effect control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit (bit 7) of EXT data is always set to "0". Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

As a method of transmitting the effect control command, the game control microcomputer 90560 converts a 2-byte effect control command into a serial signal by using a serial communication circuit (not shown) mounted on the game control microcomputer 90560. However, a serial communication method is used in which the production control command data is output from the main board 9031 to the production control board 9080 by one serial signal line.

In the example shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, the variation pattern command and the display result designation command are the variable display (variation) and the second special of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 908a. The image display that can be used in common with the variable display (fluctuation) of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol on the symbol display device 908b, and the effect of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed. When controlling the production parts such as the device 909, it is possible not to increase the types of commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90560 to the production control microcomputer 90100.

35 and 36 are flowcharts showing an example of a program of special symbol process processing (step S9026) executed by the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, CPU 9056) mounted on the main board 9031. As described above, in the special symbol process process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display device 908a or the second special symbol display device 908b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process processing, the CPU 9056, if the first starting opening switch 9013a for detecting that the game ball has won the first starting winning opening 9013 is turned on, that is, starting to the first starting winning opening 9013 If a winning has occurred, a first starting opening switch passage process is executed (steps S90311 and S90312). Further, the CPU 9056, if the second start opening switch 9014a for detecting that the game ball is won in the second start winning opening 9014 is turned on, that is, the start winning to the second start winning opening 9014 has occurred. Then, the second starting opening switch passage processing is executed (steps S90313 and S90314). Then, any one of steps S90300 to S90310 is performed. If the first starting port switch 9013a or the second starting port switch 9014a is not turned on, any one of steps S90300 to S90310 is performed according to the internal state.

The processes of steps S903O to S90310 are the following processes.

Special symbol normal processing (step S90300): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 0. When the variable display of the special symbol can be started, the game control microcomputer 90560 confirms the number of stored numerical data (total number of reserved storages) stored in the reserved storage buffer. The storage number of the numerical data stored in the storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total storage number counter. Also, if the count value of the total pending storage number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit. When making a big hit, the big hit flag is set. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S90301. The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game is over.

Variation pattern setting process (step S90301): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. In addition, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of the variable display until the derivation display (stop display) of the display result) is the variation time of the variable display of the special symbol. Decide to do. In addition, a variation pattern command according to the determined variation pattern is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90100, and a variation time timer for measuring the variation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S90302.

Display result designation command transmission process (step S90302): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. The control for transmitting the display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S90303.

Special symbol fluctuation process (step S90303): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in step S90301 times out, that is, the value of the variation time timer becomes 0), the effect control microcomputer 90100 determines the symbol. Control to transmit the designated command is performed, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to step S90304. Note that the effect control microcomputer 90100 controls the effect display device 909 so that the fourth symbol is stopped when the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 90560 is received.

Special symbol stop process (step S90304): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. When the big hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S90305. If the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S90308. When neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S90300. In this embodiment, based on the value of the special symbol process flag being 4, as will be described later, special symbol display control for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol in the special symbol display control process. The data is set in the output buffer for the special symbol display control data setting (see FIG. 46), and the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed according to the setting contents of the output buffer in the display control process of step S9022.

Special winning opening opening pre-processing (step S90305): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. In the special winning opening opening pre-processing, control for opening the special winning opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the special winning opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 9021 is driven to open the special winning opening. In addition, while performing control to send the special winning opening opening designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100, the execution time of the special winning opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to step S90306. To a value corresponding to (6 in this example). The special winning opening opening pre-processing is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the special winning opening opening pre-processing is also processing for starting the big hit game. In addition, the special winning opening opening designation command is transmitted for each round with a value designating that round set in the EXT data, so that a different special winning opening opening designation command is transmitted for each round. For example, when executing the first round during the big hit game, a special winning opening open designation command (A101(H)) designating round 1 is transmitted, and when executing the tenth round during the big hit game. Sends a special winning opening open designation command (A10A(H)) designating round 10.

Special winning opening opening process (step S90306): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. In the process of opening the special winning opening, a process of confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special winning opening is performed. If the closing condition for the special winning opening is satisfied, and if there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S90305. In addition, while performing control to send the designation command after opening during the big hit to the production control microcomputer 90100, when all rounds have been completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to a value corresponding to step S90307 (this In the example, update to 7).

Big hit end processing (step S90307): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. The control for causing the effect control microcomputer 90100 to perform display control for notifying the player that the jackpot gaming state has ended. Also, a process of setting a flag indicating the gaming state (for example, a probability variation flag or a time saving flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S90300.

Small hit opening pre-processing (step S90308): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the small hit opening pre-processing, control for opening the special winning opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the special winning opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 9021 is driven to open the special winning opening. In addition, the execution time of the special winning opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value (9 in this example) corresponding to step S90309. In addition, the small hit opening pre-processing is executed each time the big winning opening is opened during the small hit game, but when the first opening during the small hit game is started, the small hit opening pre-processing is the small hit game. It is also the process to start.

Small hitting open process (step S90309): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 9. The processing etc. which confirms the closing conditions of the special winning opening are performed. If the closing condition of the special winning opening is satisfied, and if the number of times of opening the special winning opening still remains, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S90308. Update. In addition, when all opening is completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (10 in this example) corresponding to step S90310.

Small hit end processing (step S90310): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. The control for causing the effect control microcomputer 90100 to perform the display control for notifying the player that the small hitting game state has ended. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S90300.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the starting opening switch passage processing in steps S90312 and S90314. Of these, FIG. 37(A) is a flowchart showing the first starting port switch passage processing in step S90312. Further, FIG. 37B is a flowchart showing the second starting opening switch passage processing of step S90314.

First, the first starting port switch passage processing will be described with reference to FIG. In the first start opening switch passage process executed when the first start opening switch 9013a is in the ON state, the CPU 9056 first determines whether or not the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, It is confirmed whether or not the value of the first reserved storage number counter for counting the number of 1 reserved storage is 4 (step S901121A). If the first number of reserved storages has reached the upper limit value, the processing is ended as it is.

If the first pending storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 9056 increments the value of the first pending storage number counter by 1 (step S901212A), and at the same time, the value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number. Is incremented by 1 (step S901213A). Next, the CPU 9056 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 9053 and a counter for generating a software random number, and storing them in the storage area of the first pending storage buffer (see FIG. 38) (step S901214A). .. In the process of step S901214A, a random number R′ (random number for jackpot determination) that is a hardware random number, a jackpot type determination random number (random 1′) that is a software random number, and a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2′). And a random number for random pattern determination (random 3') is extracted and stored in the storage area. It should be noted that the random number for fluctuation pattern determination (random 3') is not extracted and stored in the storage area in advance in the first starting opening switch passage process (at the time of winning a prize), but is extracted when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started. You may do so. For example, the game control microcomputer 90560 may directly extract a value from a fluctuation pattern determination random number counter for generating a fluctuation pattern determination random number (random 3′) in a fluctuation pattern setting process described later. ..

FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (holding storage buffer) for storing random numbers and the like corresponding to the holding storage. As shown in FIG. 38, in the first reserved storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the first reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured. In addition, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the second reserved storage number is secured in the second reserved storage buffer. In this embodiment, in the first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer, a random number R′ (a big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number and a big hit type determination random number (random 1′) that is a software random number. The random number for determining the variation pattern type (random 2′) and the random number for determining the variation pattern (random 3′) are stored. The first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer are formed in the RAM 9055.

In this embodiment, a random number value such as a big hit determination random number is stored in the first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer as pending storage, but the predetermined information stored as pending storage is Not limited to random numbers. For example, whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit may be determined in advance based on a big hit determination random number and the determination result may be stored as a hold storage in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer. ..

Next, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the time saving flag indicating that the gaming state is the time saving state (high base state) is set (step S901215A). If it is set, the process directly proceeds to step S901220A. If the time saving flag is not set, the CPU 9056 confirms whether the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (step S901216A). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (that is, in the big hit game state or the small hit game state), the CPU 9056 proceeds to step S901220A as it is.

If the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 5, the winning display effect process for determining the variation display result and the variation pattern type when the variation based on the detected starting winning is subsequently executed is executed (step) S901217A). Then, the CPU 9056 performs control of transmitting a symbol designating command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 based on the determination result of the winning effect process (step S901218A), and also transmits a variation category command to the effect control microcomputer 90100. Control is performed (step S901219A). Further, the CPU 9056 controls to send the first reserved storage number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (step S901220A).

In addition, by executing the processing of steps S901218A and S901219A, in this embodiment, the CPU 9056 always designates the symbol every time the starting winning prize is given to the first starting winning opening 9013 and the winning effect processing of step S901217A is executed. Both the command and the variation category command are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90100.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the process of steps S901218A to S901202A is executed, a start winning is generated in the first starting winning opening 9013, and when the winning effect process of step S901217A is executed, a symbol is designated. A set of three commands, that is, a command, a variable category command, and a first reserved storage number addition designation command are collectively transmitted within one timer interrupt.

However, when the winning effect process of step S901217A is not executed by determining Y in step S901215A or step S901216A, the CPU 9056 controls in step S901220A to transmit only the first reserved storage number addition designation command. The winning determination result designation command (symbol designation command, variation category command) is not controlled. It should be noted that when the effect processing at the time of winning in step S901217A is not executed, the determination result at the time of winning is set by setting a value (for example, “FF(H)”) indicating that the result of the winning determination cannot be specified as the EXT data. You may make it transmit a command (designation command, variation category command).

In addition, in this embodiment, the process of step S901215A is executed, so that when there is a start winning a prize to the first start winning hole 9013, only when the game state is the low base state, the step S901217A A prize winning effect process is executed. In addition, in this embodiment, the process of step S901216A is executed, so that when there is a start winning prize in the first start winning hole 9013, only in the case where it is not the big hit game state or the small hit game state, step S901217A. The winning effect production process is executed. It should be noted that it is possible not to shift to step S901217A only in the big hit game state, and to shift to step S901217A in the small hit game state to execute the winning effect processing.

Further, in this embodiment, the jackpot gaming state (specific gaming state) is a control in which the jackpot is opened for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) after being notified that the jackpot is started. It is a state until the end of opening the special winning opening of the final round and notification of the end of the big hit. Specifically, it is a state in which the processes from the special winning opening opening pre-process (see step S90305) to the big hit ending process (see step S90307) in the special symbol process process are being executed.

Next, the second starting opening switch passage processing will be described with reference to FIG. In the second starting opening switch passage process executed when the second starting opening switch 9014a is in the ON state, the CPU 9056 determines whether or not the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the second pending storage number). It is confirmed whether or not the value of the second reserved storage number counter for counting the storage number is 4 (step S901212B). If the second number of reserved storages has reached the upper limit value, the processing is terminated as it is.

If the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit, the CPU 9056 increments the value of the second reserved storage number counter by 1 (step S901212B), and at the same time, the value of the total reserved storage number counter for counting the total reserved storage number. Is incremented by 1 (step S901213B). Next, the CPU 9056 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 9053 and a counter for generating a software random number and storing them in the storage area in the second reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 38) (step S901214B). .. In the process of step S901214B, a random number R'(random number for jackpot determination) that is a hardware random number, a random number for jackpot type determination (random 1') that is a software random number, a random number for variation pattern type determination (random 2'). And a random number for fluctuation pattern determination (random 3') is extracted and stored in the storage area. Random pattern determination random number (random 3') is not extracted and stored in the storage area in advance in the second starting opening switch passage process (at the time of starting winning), but is extracted at the start of the variation of the second special symbol. You may do so. For example, the game control microcomputer 90560 may directly extract a value from a fluctuation pattern determination random number counter for generating a fluctuation pattern determination random number (random 3′) in a fluctuation pattern setting process described later. ..

Next, the CPU 9056 executes a winning effect process (step S901217B). Then, the CPU 9056 performs control for transmitting a symbol designating command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 based on the determination result of the winning effect process (step S901218B), and also transmits a variation category command to the effect control microcomputer 90100. Control is performed (step S901219B). Further, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit the second reserved storage number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (step S901220B).

In addition, by executing the processes of steps S901218B and S901219B, in this embodiment, the CPU 9056 always designates the symbol every time the start winning a prize is given to the second starting winning opening 9014 and the winning effect process of step S901217B is executed. Both the command and the variation category command are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90100.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the processing of steps S901218B to S901220B is executed, a start winning is generated in the second starting winning opening 9014, and when the winning effect processing of step S901217B is executed, a symbol is designated. A set of three commands, that is, a command, a variable category command, and a second reserved storage number addition designation command are collectively transmitted within one timer interrupt.

In the second start opening switch passing process, the same process as in step S901215A may be performed, and the winning effect process in step S901217B may not be performed if the time saving state is achieved. That is, the winning effect process of step S901217B may be executed only in the normal state (low base state) to transmit the symbol designating command and the variation category command.

Further, also in the second starting opening switch passing process, the same process as in step S901216A may be performed, and the winning effect process in step S901217B may not be performed if a big hit game is being performed. Further, in the second starting opening switch passing process, the winning effect effect process of step S901217B may not be executed (that is, the winning judgment process may not be executed for the second special symbol). ..

39 and 40 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S90300) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 9056 confirms the value of the total number of pending storages (step S9051). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is confirmed. If the total pending storage number is 0, and if the customer waiting demo designating command has not been transmitted yet, control is performed to send the customer waiting demo designating command to the production control microcomputer 90100 (step S9051A), and the processing is executed. finish. Note that, for example, when the CPU 9056 transmits the customer waiting demo designation command in step S9051A, the CPU 9056 sets the customer waiting demo designation command transmitted flag indicating that the customer waiting demo designation command has been transmitted. Then, when the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interruption is executed after transmitting the customer waiting demo designation command, the customer waiting is repeated based on that the customer waiting demo designation command transmitted flag is set. It may be controlled not to send the demo designation command. Further, in this case, the customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted flag may be reset when the next variable display of special symbols is started.

If the total pending storage number is not 0, the CPU 9056 confirms whether the second pending storage number is 0 (step S9052). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the second reserved storage number counter is 0. If the second reserved storage number is not 0, the CPU 9056 is a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is performed for the first special symbol or the special symbol process processing is performed for the second special symbol). Is set to data indicating "second" (step S9053). If the second reserved memory number is 0 (that is, only the first reserved memory number is accumulated), the CPU 66 sets data indicating "first" to the special symbol pointer (step S9054).

In this embodiment, by performing the processes of steps S9052 to S9054, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed with respect to the variable display of the first special symbol. In other words, the second start condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is controlled so as to take precedence over the first start condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol.

Next, in the RAM 9055, the CPU 9056 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number of one indicated by the special symbol pointer and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 9055 (step S9055). Specifically, the CPU 9056, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number=1 in the first reserved storage buffer. Is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 9055. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 9056 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number=1 in the second reserved storage buffer. It is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 9055.

Then, the CPU 9056 subtracts 1 from the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the content of each storage area (step S9056). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 9056 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage number counter, and in the reserved specific area and the first reserved storage buffer. Shift the contents of each storage area. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each reserved area in the reserved specific area and the second reserved memory buffer are shifted. To do.

That is, in the case where the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 9056 stores the first reserved storage buffer of the RAM 9055 in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number=n (n=2, 3, 4). Each stored random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first number of pending storages=n-1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", each is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second number of reserved memories=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory buffer of the RAM 9055. The random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number=n-1. Further, the CPU 9056 adds up the values (the values indicating “first” or “second”) stored in the storage areas corresponding to the total reserved storage number=m (m=2 to 8) in the reserved specific area. Store in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storages=m-1.

Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective first reserved memory numbers (or the respective second reserved memory numbers) are always extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or, The second reserved memory number)=1, 2, 3, 4 and the order. Further, the order in which the respective values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective total reserved storage numbers are extracted is always the same as the order of the total reserved storage numbers=1-8.

Then, the CPU 9056 decrements the value of the total pending storage number by 1. That is, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is decremented by 1 (step S9058). The CPU 9056 saves the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is subtracted by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 9055.

In addition, the CPU 9056 controls to transmit a background designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 according to the current game state (step S9060). In this case, the CPU 9056 controls to transmit the probability variation state background designation command when the probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state is set. Further, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit the time saving state background designation command when only the time saving flag indicating the time saving state is set and the probability variation flag is not set. If neither the probability variation flag nor the time saving flag is set, the CPU 9056 controls to transmit the normal state background designating command.

In addition, specifically, when the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90100, the CPU 9056 sets the address of the command transmission table (preliminarily set for each command in the ROM) according to the effect control command. Set it to a pointer. Then, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command is set in the pointer, and the effect control command is transmitted in the effect control command control process (step S9028). In this embodiment, when the variation of the special symbol is started, the background designation command, the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, the reserved storage number subtraction designation command (the first reserved storage number subtraction) for each timer interrupt. The designated command or the second reserved storage number subtraction designated command) is transmitted in order to the effect control microcomputer 90100. Specifically, when the fluctuation of the special symbol is started, first, a background designation command is transmitted, a variation pattern command is transmitted after 4 ms has elapsed, a display result designation command has been transmitted after 4 ms has elapsed, and further 4 ms has elapsed. The reserved storage count subtraction designation command (the first reserved storage count subtraction designation command or the second reserved storage count subtraction designation command) is transmitted. In addition, when the variation of the special symbol is started, the symbol variation designation command (first symbol variation designation command, second symbol variation designation command) is also transmitted, but the symbol variation designation command is the same timer interrupt as the variation pattern command. Is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90100.

In the special symbol normal process, first, data indicating "first" indicating that the process is executed targeting the first starting winning opening 9013, that is, indicating that performing the process targeting the first special symbol "first" Or data indicating "second" indicating that the process is executed for the second start winning opening 9014, that is, indicating "second" indicating that the process is executed for the second special symbol. The data is set in the special symbol pointer. Then, in the subsequent processing in the special symbol process processing, processing according to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the processes of steps S90300 to S90310 can be shared between the case of targeting the first special symbol and the case of targeting the second special symbol.

Next, the CPU 9056 reads out a random R′ (random number for jackpot determination) from the random number buffer area and executes the jackpot determination module. In this case, the CPU 9056 is for the big hit determination that is extracted in step S901214A of the first starting opening switch passage processing or step S901214B of the second starting opening switch passage processing and stored in advance in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer. Read the random number and judge the big hit. The jackpot determination module compares a predetermined jackpot determination value or a jackpot determination value (see FIG. 32) with a jackpot determination random number, and when they match, executes processing to determine a jackpot or a jackpot. It is a program to do. That is, it is a program that executes the processing of the big hit judgment and the small hit judgment.

In the jackpot determination process, the probability of a jackpot is higher when the gaming state is the probable variation state than when the gaming state is the non-probability variation state (normal state). Specifically, the probability variation big hit determination table in which a large number of big hit determination values are set in advance (a table in which the numerical values on the right side of FIG. 32A in ROM 9054 are set) and the number of big hit determination values An ordinary jackpot determination table (a table in which the numerical values on the left side of FIG. 32A in ROM 9054 are set) that are set to be smaller than the hour jackpot determination table is provided. Then, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the gaming state is the probability variation state, and when the gaming state is the probability variation state, performs the jackpot determination process using the probability variation big jackpot determination table, and the gaming state is normal. When it is in the state, the jackpot determination table for normal time is used to perform the jackpot determination process. That is, the CPU 9056 determines that the special symbol is a big hit when the value of the random number for big hit determination (random R′) matches any of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 32(A). When it is determined to be a big hit (step S9061), the process proceeds to step S9071. In addition, to decide whether or not to be a big hit, it is to decide whether or not to shift to the big hit gaming state, but to decide whether or not to make the stop symbol in the special symbol display a big hit symbol But also.

It should be noted that whether or not the current gaming state is the probability variation state is confirmed by whether or not the probability variation flag is set. The probability variation flag is set when shifting the game state to the probability variation state, and reset when ending the probability variation state. Specifically, it is determined to be a "probability variation jackpot" or "a sudden variation jackpot", and is set in the process of ending the jackpot game. After the jackpot game is over, it is reset when the next jackpot occurs.

If the value of the big hit determination random number (random R′) does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in step S9061), the CPU 9056 uses the small hit determination table (see FIGS. 32B and 32C). Use to perform a small hit determination process. That is, when the value of the random number for random determination (random R') matches the small hit determination value shown in FIGS. 32B and 32C, the CPU 9056 determines to make a small hit for the special symbol. . In this case, the CPU 9056 confirms the data indicated by the special symbol pointer, and if the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is "first", the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. 32(B) ) Is used to decide whether to make a small hit. If the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is "second", it is determined whether or not to make a small hit using the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 32(C). . When it is determined to be a small hit (step S9062), the CPU 9056 sets a small hit flag indicating that it is a small hit (step S9063), and proceeds to step S9075.

If the value of the random R′ does not match either the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (N in step S9062), that is, if the value is out of alignment, the process directly proceeds to step S9075.

In step S9071, the CPU 9056 sets a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit. Then, as a table used for determining the jackpot type to any of a plurality of types, the jackpot type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer is selected (step S9072). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 9056 selects the jackpot type determination table 90131a for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 32(D). Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 9056 selects the jackpot type determination table 90131b for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 32(E).

Next, the CPU 9056 uses the selected jackpot type determination table to select a type (“normal jackpot”, “normal jackpot”, “random number” corresponding to the value of the random number (random 1′) for jackpot type determination stored in the random number buffer area. "Sudden variation jackpot" or "sudden variation jackpot") is determined as the type of jackpot (step S9073). In this case, the CPU 9056 determines the jackpot type which is extracted in step S901214A of the first starting opening switch passage processing or step S901214B of the second starting opening switch passage processing and stored in advance in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer. The random number for use is read and the jackpot type is determined. Further, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 32D and 32E, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is compared with the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Therefore, there is a high percentage of sudden probability jackpots being selected.

Further, the CPU 9056 sets data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 9055 (step S9074). For example, when the big hit type is "normal big hit", "01" is set as the data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is "probable variation big hit", "02" is set as the data indicating the big hit type, When the big hit type is "sudden change big hit", "03" is set as data showing the big hit type.

Next, the CPU 9056 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol (step S9075). Specifically, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, "-" which is the deviating symbol is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the big hit flag is set, depending on the big hit type decision result, one of the big hit symbols "1", "3", "7", "9" is decided as a stop symbol of the special symbol. To do. That is, when the jackpot type is determined to be "sudden sudden change jackpot", "1" is determined as a stop symbol of the special symbol, and when "normal jackpot" is determined, "3" is determined as a stop symbol of the special symbol. However, when the "probable variation big hit" is determined, "7" is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. Further, when the small hit flag is set, "5" which is a small hit symbol is determined as a stop symbol of the special symbol.

In this embodiment, the big hit type is first determined, and the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the determined big hit type is shown. However, the method of determining the big symbol type and the stop symbol of the special symbol is The invention is not limited to the one shown in the embodiment. For example, a table in which the stop symbols of the special symbols are associated with the jackpot types is prepared in advance, and the stop symbols of the special symbols are first determined based on the random number for determining the jackpot type, and the corresponding jackpots are determined based on the determination result. The type may be determined.

Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S90301) (step S9076).

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern setting process (step S90301) in the special symbol process process. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S9091). When the big hit flag is set, the CPU 9056 selects one of the big hit fluctuation pattern type determination tables as a table used to determine one of a plurality of kinds of fluctuation pattern types (step). S9092). Then, the process proceeds to step S90100.

When the big hit flag is not set, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S9093). When the small hit flag is set, the CPU 9056 selects the small hit variation pattern type determination table as a table used for determining the variation pattern type to any one of a plurality of types (step S9094). ). Then, the process proceeds to step S90100.

If the small hit flag is also not set, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the time saving flag indicating the time saving state is set (step S9095). In this embodiment, the time saving flag is set when the jackpot game based on the normal jackpot is completed, and the hour saving flag is set, and the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot is also entered into the probability changing state and the hour saving state. The time saving flag is set because it is also transferred to. Therefore, if it is determined to be Y in step S9095, in addition to when the normal short-hit game based on the big jackpot is only controlled to the short-time state, after the big-hit game based on the probable variation big hit, it is controlled to the time-shortened state with the positive variation state. Sometimes it is done.

If the time saving flag is not set (N in step S9095), that is, if the game state is the normal state, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the total pending storage number is 3 or more (step S9096). If the total number of pending storages is less than 3 (N in step S9096), the CPU 9056 determines that the variation pattern type for out-of-normal use is a table used for determining the variation pattern type to any one of a plurality of types. A judgment table is selected (step S9097). Then, the process proceeds to step S90100.

If the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (Y in step S9096), the CPU 9056 uses the fluctuation for shortening as a table used for determining the fluctuation pattern type to any one of a plurality of kinds. A pattern type determination table is selected (step S9098). Then, the process proceeds to step S90100.

When the time saving flag is set (Y in step S9095), that is, when the gaming state is the probability changing state or the time saving state, the CPU 9056 determines the variation pattern type to be one of a plurality of types. As the table to be used, the out-of-time variation pattern type determination table for time saving is selected (step S9099). Then, the process proceeds to step S90100.

In this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S9095-S9099, when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the variation pattern type for out-of-shift for shortening is determined. The table is selected. Further, when the gaming state is the probability change state or the time saving state, the out-of-time variation pattern type determination table for time saving is selected. In this case, the variation pattern type for shortening variation may be determined as the variation pattern type in the process of step S90100 described later. If the variation pattern type for shortening variation is determined, the variation pattern type may be varied in the process of step S90102. A fluctuation pattern for shortening fluctuation is determined as a pattern. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is the probability variation state or the time saving state, or when the total number of pending storage is 3 or more, the variation display of the shortening variation may be displayed. In this embodiment, the case where the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation used in the probability variation state or the time saving state and the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation based on the number of pending storages are different tables are shown. However, a common table may be used as the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation.

In this embodiment, even when the game state is the probability change state or the time saving state, when the total pending storage number is almost 0 (for example, 0, 0 or 1) May not display the fluctuation display of the shortening fluctuation. In this case, for example, when the CPU 9056 determines Y in step S9095, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the total number of pending storages is almost 0. The variation pattern type determination table for use may be selected.

Next, the CPU 9056 reads out random 2′ (random pattern determination random number) from the random number buffer area (first pending storage buffer or second pending storage buffer) and selects it in the processing of step S9092, S9094, S9097, S9098 or S9099. By referring to the table, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be one of the plural types (step S90100).

Next, the CPU 9056 selects one of the hit variation pattern determination table and the out-of-range variation pattern determination table as a table used for determining the variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S90100. Any one of them is selected (step S90101). In addition, the random number 3′ (random number for fluctuation pattern determination) is read from the random number buffer area (first reserved memory buffer or second reserved memory buffer), and the fluctuation pattern determination table selected in the process of step S90101 is referred to The pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S90102). When the random number 3'(fluctuation pattern determination random number) is not extracted at the timing of the start winning, the CPU 9056 uses the variation pattern determination random number for generating the variation pattern determination random number 3'. The value may be directly extracted from the random number counter, and the variation pattern may be determined based on the extracted random number value.

Next, the CPU 9056 performs control for transmitting the symbol variation designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (step S90103). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 9056 controls to transmit the first symbol variation designation command. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 9056 controls to transmit the second symbol variation designation command. Further, the CPU 9056 performs control for transmitting the effect control command (fluctuation pattern command) corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (step S90104).

Next, the CPU 9056 sets, in the fluctuation time timer formed in the RAM 9055, a value according to the fluctuation time corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern (step S90105). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the display result designation command transmission process (step S90302) (step S90106).

In addition, when it is determined to be out of alignment, instead of suddenly determining the variation pattern type, first, it may be determined whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a random number for reach determination. Then, the variation pattern type may be determined by executing the processing of steps S9095 to S90100 based on the determination result of whether or not to reach. In this case, a variation pattern type determination table for non-reach, and a variation pattern type determination table for reach are prepared in advance, and based on the reach determination result, one of the variation pattern type determination tables is selected, The variation pattern type may be determined.

FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the display result designation command transmission process (step S90302). In the display result designation command transmission processing, the CPU 9056 transmits the effect control command (see FIG. 33) of any one of the display result 1 designation to the display result 5 designation in accordance with the determined type of big hit, small hit, or loss. Control. Specifically, the CPU 9056 first confirms whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S90110). If not set, the process moves to step S90116. When the jackpot flag is set and the jackpot type is "normal jackpot", control is performed to transmit the display result 2 designation command (steps S90111, S90112). Whether or not the "normal big hit" can be specifically determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S9074 of the special symbol normal process is "01". .. Further, when the type of the big hit is “probable variation big hit”, the CPU 9056 controls to transmit the display result 3 designation command (steps S90113, S90114). Whether or not the “probable variation big hit” can be specifically determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S9074 of the special symbol normal processing is “02”. .. Then, when it is neither "normal big hit" nor "probability variation big hit" (that is, "a sudden probability variation big hit"), the CPU 9056 controls to transmit the display result 4 designation command (step S90115).

On the other hand, when the big hit flag is not set (N in step S90110), the CPU 9056 confirms whether the small hit flag is set (step S90116). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 9056 controls to transmit the display result 5 designation command (step S90117). When the small hit flag is also not set (N in step S90116), that is, when the flag is out of alignment, the CPU 9056 controls to transmit the display result 1 designation command (step S90118).

Then, the CPU 9056 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol changing process (step S90303) (step S90119).

FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (step S90303) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol changing process, the CPU 9056 first confirms whether the reserved storage number subtraction designation command (the first reserved storage number subtraction designation command or the second reserved storage number subtraction designation command) has already been transmitted ( Step S901121). Whether or not the pending storage number subtraction designation command has already been transmitted indicates, for example, that the pending storage number subtraction designation command has been transmitted when the pending storage number subtraction designation command is transmitted in step S901122 described later. The storage number subtraction designation command transmitted flag may be set, and in step S901121, it may be confirmed whether or not the reserved storage number subtraction designation command transmitted flag is set. Further, in this case, the set storage amount subtraction designation command transmitted flag is set to be reset by a special symbol stop process or a jackpot end process, which will be described later, when terminating variable display of the special symbol or terminating the jackpot. Good.

Next, if the reservation storage number subtraction designation command has not been transmitted, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit the reservation storage number subtraction designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (step S901112). In this case, when the value indicating “first” is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit the first reserved storage number subtraction designation command. Further, when the value indicating “second” is set to the special symbol pointer, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit the second reserved storage number subtraction designation command.

Next, the CPU 9056 decrements the variable time timer by 1 (step S901125), and when the variable time timer times out (step S901126), controls to transmit a symbol finalization designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (step S901127). Then, the CPU 9056 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (step S90304) (step S901128). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process is terminated as it is.

FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process (step S90304) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S90131). If the big hit flag is set, the CPU 9056, if set, the probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state, the time saving flag indicating the time saving state, and the number of times the special symbol can fluctuate in the time saving state. Is reset (step S90132), and control for transmitting a big hit start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 is performed (step S90133). Specifically, when the type of big hit is "normal big hit", a big hit start 1 designation command (command A001 (H)) is transmitted. If the type of the big hit is "probable variation big hit", the big hit start 2 designation command (command A002 (H)) is transmitted. When the type of the big hit is the sudden probability big hit, the small hit/sudden sudden big hit start designation command (command A003(H)) is transmitted. Whether the type of jackpot is "normal jackpot", "probability variation jackpot" or "sudden variation jackpot" is data indicating the jackpot type stored in the RAM 9055 (data stored in the jackpot type buffer). It is judged based on.

Further, a value corresponding to the big hit display time (a time at which, for example, the effect display device 909 is notified that the big hit has occurred) is set in the big hit display time timer (step S90134). In addition, the number of times of opening (for example, 15 times in the case of "normal big hit" or "probability variation big hit", 2 times in the case of "sudden probability variation big hit") is set in the special winning opening release counter (step S90135). . Also, the round time per round in the big hit game is set. Specifically, in the case of sudden probability big hit, 0.1 second is set as the round time, and in the case of normal big hit or probability big hit, the round time is set to 29 seconds. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening preprocessing (step S90305) (step S90136).

If the big hit flag is not set in step S9011, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the value of the hour/hour counter that indicates the number of times the special symbol can fluctuate in the hour/short state is 0 (step S90137). If the value of the hour/hour counter is not 0, the CPU 9056 decrements the value of the hour/hour counter by -1 (step S90138). Then, when the value of the hour/hour counter after subtraction becomes 0 (step S90139), the CPU 9056 resets the hour/hour flag (step S90140).

Next, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S90141). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 9056 sends a small hit/suddenly probable variation big hit start designation command (command A003(H)) to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (step S90142). Further, a value corresponding to the small hit display time (a time at which the effect display device 909 notifies that the small hit has occurred) is set in the small hit display time timer (step S90143). In addition, the number of times of opening (for example, twice) is set in the special winning opening opening number counter (step S90144). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the small hit start preprocessing (step S90308) (step S90145).

If the small hit flag is not set (N in step S90141), the CPU 9056 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S90300) (step S90146).

FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the big hit ending process (step S90307) in the special symbol process process. In the big hit ending process, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the big hit end display timer is set (step S90160), and if the big hit end display timer is set, moves to step S90164. When the big hit end display timer is not set, the big hit flag is reset (step S90161), and control for transmitting the big hit end designation command is performed (step S90162). Here, in the case of "normal big hit", the big hit end 1 designation command (command A301(H)) is transmitted, and in the case of "probability variation big hit" big hit end 2 designation command (command A302(H)) ) Is transmitted, and if it is "a sudden probability big hit", a small hit/a sudden probability big hit end designation command (command A303(H)) is transmitted. Then, the jackpot end display timer is set to a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the jackpot end display is being performed on the image display device 909 (big hit end display time) (step S90163), and the process ends.

In step S90164, 1 is subtracted from the value of the jackpot end display timer. Then, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the value of the big hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the big hit end display time has elapsed (step S90165). If not, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step S90165), the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the jackpot game to be finished this time is based on the normal jackpot (step S90166). Whether or not to end the big hit game based on the normal big hit, specifically, whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S9074 of the special symbol normal process is "01". It can be determined by checking. When the big hit game based on the normal big hit is finished (Y in step S90166), the CPU 9056 sets the time saving flag and shifts the game state to the time saving state (step S90167). Further, the CPU 9056 sets a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example) in the time saving number counter (step S90168).

Unless the big hit game based on the normal big hit is finished (that is, when the big hit game based on the probability variation big hit or sudden probability big hit is terminated), the CPU 9056 sets the probability variation flag to the probability state. Along with the shift (step S90169), the time saving flag is set to shift the game state to the time saving state (step S90170).

Then, the CPU 9056 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S90300) (step S90171).

In addition, in this embodiment, when the probability variation state is controlled by performing the above processing, the time saving state is also controlled, so that the gaming state is the normal state (low probability/low base state). ), a short-time state (low probability/high base state), and a stochastic state (high probability/high base state).

FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing an example of a program of special symbol display control processing (step S9032) executed by the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, CPU 9056) mounted on the main board 9031. In the special symbol display control process, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (step S903201). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (that is, if the special symbol changing process is being executed), the CPU 9056 sets the special symbol display control data for the special symbol variation display for the special symbol display control data setting. A process for setting or updating the output buffer is performed (step S903202). In this case, the CPU 9056 sets or updates the special symbol display control data for performing variable display of the special symbol indicated by the special symbol pointer (first special symbol or second special symbol). For example, if the changing speed is 1 frame/0.2 seconds, the value of the special symbol display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by 1 every 0.2 seconds. Then, after that, the display control process (see step S9022) is executed, and the drive signal is output to the special symbol display devices 908a and 908b according to the contents of the output buffer for the special symbol display control data setting, The variable display of the special symbols on the special symbol display devices 908a and 908b is executed.

If the value of the special symbol process flag is not 3, the CPU 9056 confirms whether the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (step S903203). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (that is, in the case of shifting to the special symbol stop process), the CPU 9056 is a special symbol for stopping the stop symbol of the special symbol set in the special symbol normal process. A process of setting the display control data in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data is performed (step S903204). In this case, the CPU 9056 sets the special symbol display control data for displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. Then, after that, the display control process (see step S9022) is executed, and the drive signal is output to the special symbol display devices 908a and 908b according to the contents of the output buffer for the special symbol display control data setting, The stop symbols of the special symbols are stopped and displayed on the special symbol display devices 908a and 908b. After the process of step S903204 is executed and the special symbol display control data for stop symbol display is set, the setting data is not changed, so the latest special symbol display control data is displayed in the display control process of step S9022. Based on this, the latest stop symbol will be stopped and displayed until the next variable display is started. If the value of the special symbol process flag is either 2 or 3 in step S90301 (that is, either the display result designation command transmission process or the special symbol changing process), for the special symbol variation display. The special symbol display control data may be updated. In this case, in order not to cause a discrepancy between the variation time recognized on the game control microcomputer 90560 side and the variation time recognized on the effect control microcomputer 90100 side, the display result designation command transmission process also varies. The time timer may be configured to be decremented by 1.

In this embodiment, the case where the special symbol display control data is set in the output buffer according to the value of the special symbol process flag is shown. However, in the special symbol process process, the start flag is set at the start of variation of the special symbol. At the same time, the end flag may be set at the end of the change of the special symbol. Then, in the special symbol display control process (step S9032), the CPU 9056 starts updating the value of the special symbol display control data based on the start flag being set, and based on the end flag being set. The special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol may be set.

Next, the configuration and operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 47 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the effect control microcomputer 90100 mounted on the effect control board 9080. The effect control microcomputer 90100 shown in FIG. 47 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and has an effect control CPU 90101, a clock circuit 90110, an internal ROM 90111, an internal RAM 90112, a timer circuit 90113, an interrupt controller 90114, and a serial. And a communication circuit 90115. Although not shown in FIG. 47, the effect control microcomputer 90100 includes various circuits such as an external bus interface, a random number circuit, a reset circuit, an arithmetic circuit, a watchdog timer, an address decode circuit, and an input/output port. And interface and port.

FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an address map in the effect control microcomputer 90100. As shown in FIG. 48, in the area from address 0000H to address FFFFH, the area allocated to the internal ROM of the effect control microcomputer 90100, the area allocated to the internal RAM, and the internal register area allocated to the internal register are allocated. Area etc. are included. Further, as shown in FIG. 48, the area allocated to the built-in ROM includes a program code/data area (area for storing user programs and data) and a program management area. The program management area is a storage area that stores information necessary for performing various settings such as interrupt operation settings of the production control microcomputer 90100, serial communication circuit settings, random number circuit settings, and internal reset operation settings. is there.

The interrupt controller 90114 is a circuit that controls various interrupt requests in the effect control microcomputer 90100 such as serial reception interrupt and timer interrupt. The interrupt controller 90114 includes an interrupt control register for setting permission/prohibition of interrupts and priority of interrupts for each type of interrupt.

FIG. 49A shows a configuration example of an interrupt control register for serial reception interrupt setting included in the interrupt controller 90114. FIG. 49(B) shows an example of setting contents in each bit of the internal information data stored in the interrupt control register for setting serial reception interrupt. The internal information data Im7 stored in the bit number [7] of the interrupt control register for setting the serial reception interrupt indicates whether or not the serial reception interrupt is permitted. In the example shown in FIG. 49B, if the bit value of the internal information data Im7 is set to "0", the serial reception interrupt is set to the enabled state, while the bit of the internal information data Im7 is set to "1". Then, the serial reception interrupt is set to the disabled state. In the example shown in FIG. 49B, the initial value of the internal information data Im7 is set to "1".

The internal information data Im3 to Im0 stored in the bit number [3-0] of the interrupt control register for setting the serial reception interrupt indicates the priority of the serial reception interrupt. In the example shown in FIG. 49(B), the internal information data Im3 to Im0 are set in 16-step numerical values of “0000 [0(H)]” to “1111 [F(H)]”, and “0000[0( "H)]" has the highest priority of the serial reception interrupt, and "1111 [F(H)]" has the lowest priority of the serial reception interrupt.

FIG. 50A shows a configuration example of an interrupt control register for setting a timer interrupt provided in the interrupt controller 90114. FIG. 50(B) shows an example of setting contents in each bit of the internal information data stored in the interrupt control register for timer interrupt setting. The internal information data In7 stored in the bit number [7] of the interrupt control register for setting the timer interrupt indicates whether or not the timer interrupt is permitted. In the example shown in FIG. 50B, if the bit value of the internal information data In7 is set to "0", the timer interrupt is set to the enable state, while the bit of the internal information data In7 is set to "1". For example, timer interrupt is set to disabled state. Note that in the example shown in FIG. 50B, the initial value of the internal information data In7 is set to "1".

The internal information data In3 to In0 stored in the bit number [3-0] of the interrupt control register for setting the timer interrupt indicates the priority of the timer interrupt. In the example shown in FIG. 50(B), the internal information data In3 to In0 are set by the numerical values of 16 levels of "0000 [0(H)]" to "1111 [F(H)]", and "0000[0( "H)]" has the highest priority for timer interrupts, and "1111 [F(H)]" has the lowest priority for timer interrupts.

Note that, in the examples shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, the interrupt control registers for serial reception interrupt setting and timer interrupt setting are shown as an example. If an interrupt request such as an external interrupt, a serial transmission interrupt, or an interrupt due to the random number of the random number circuit is accepted, an interrupt control register is provided for each interrupt, as shown in FIG. The interrupt control registers are configured according to the same configuration as in FIG. Further, for example, when the serial communication circuit is provided with a plurality of channels and the serial reception interrupt and the serial transmission interrupt are configured to be accepted for each channel, the serial reception interrupt setting and the serial transmission are set for each channel. An interrupt control register for setting an interrupt is provided. Further, for example, when a plurality of timer circuits are provided and configured to accept a plurality of types of timer interrupts, an interrupt control register is provided for each of these timer interrupts.

The setting data set in the interrupt control register shown in FIGS. 49 and 50 is set in the program management area (see FIG. 48) of the built-in ROM in advance. The effect control microcomputer 90100 performs the setting of the serial communication circuit, the setting of the random number circuit, the setting of the internal reset operation, etc. according to the setting contents of the program management area when the power of the game machine is turned on. By setting the setting data in the interrupt control register for serial reception interrupt (see FIG. 49) and the interrupt control register for timer interrupt setting (see FIG. 50) included in the interrupt controller 90114, Reception interrupts and timer interrupts are also set. Note that the effect control microcomputer 90100 executes this setting operation by hardware regardless of the program.

In this embodiment, the internal information data Im7 of the interrupt control register for serial reception interrupt shown in FIG. 49 and the internal information data register In7 of the interrupt control register for timer interrupt shown in FIG. ", and serial reception interrupt and timer interrupt are set to the enabled state, respectively. Further, in this embodiment, the internal information data Im3 to Im0 of the interrupt control register for serial reception interrupt shown in FIG. 49 are set to “0000 [0(H)]” and the timer shown in FIG. The internal information data registers In3 to In0 of the interrupt control register for interrupts are set to "0001 [1(H)]", and the serial reception interrupt is set to have a higher priority than the timer interrupt.

In this embodiment, in each of the interrupt control registers shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, “0000 [0 (H)]” and “0001 [1 (H)]” are set in order from the setting value having the higher priority. The setting mode is not limited to the setting mode shown in this embodiment. For example, “1111 [F(H)]” is set in the interrupt control register for timer interrupt setting shown in FIG. 50 in order from the setting value having the lower priority, and the serial reception interrupt setting shown in FIG. 49 is set. The interrupt control register for use may be set to "1110 [E(H)]" so that the serial reception interrupt has a higher priority than the timer interrupt. Further, for example, "0010 [2(H)]" is set in the interrupt control register for serial reception interrupt setting shown in FIG. 49, and "0100" is set in the interrupt control register for timer interrupt setting shown in FIG. By setting [4 (H)], the serial reception interrupt may be set to have a higher priority than the timer interrupt, and at least the serial reception interrupt has a higher priority than the timer interrupt. May be set so that the priority becomes high.

FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a reception register and each reception buffer for storing effect control commands received from the game control microcomputer 90560 of the main board 9031. In this embodiment, the effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 90560 is first stored in the reception register of the serial communication circuit 90115 of the effect control microcomputer 90100. The reception register of the serial communication circuit 90115 is composed of a 16-byte area of a FIFO (first-in first-out) system, and can store a maximum of eight 2-byte effect control commands.

Further, as shown in FIG. 51, each time a serial reception interrupt occurs, the effect control command stored in the reception register of the serial communication circuit 90115 is transferred to the delivery buffer. Therefore, as described above, a maximum of eight effect control commands can be stored in the reception register of the serial communication circuit 90115. However, in this embodiment, a serial reception interrupt occurs immediately after the effect control command is received. Since it is transferred to the delivery buffer, there is substantially no case where two or more effect control commands are accumulated in the reception register of the serial communication circuit 90115. In this example, the delivery buffer is a ring buffer type buffer having a capacity of 128 bytes, which is larger in capacity than the reception register of the serial communication circuit 90115, and capable of storing 64 production control commands of 2 bytes. As shown in FIG. 51, the transfer buffer is formed in the built-in RAM of the effect control microcomputer 90100.

Further, as shown in FIG. 51, the effect control command stored in the transfer buffer is transferred to the analysis buffer each time a timer interrupt occurs every 1 ms. Further, the analysis buffer is provided with two buffers (analysis buffer (upper) and analysis buffer (lower)), and the upper data (MODE data) of the effect control commands read from the delivery buffer is The data is stored in the analysis buffer (upper), and the lower data (EXT data) is stored in the analysis buffer (lower). In this embodiment, each of the analysis buffer (upper) and the analysis buffer (lower) is composed of 256 bytes having a larger capacity than the transfer buffer, and can store 256 effect control commands of 2 bytes ( Since the upper 1 byte (MODE data) of the effect control command is stored in the analysis buffer (upper) and the lower 1 byte (EXT data) is stored in the analysis buffer (lower), 256 pieces can be stored. It is a ring buffer type buffer. As shown in FIG. 51, the analysis buffer (upper) and the analysis buffer (lower) are formed in the SDRAM 90116 externally connected to the effect control microcomputer 90100.

As shown in FIG. 51, in this embodiment, when the effect control CPU 90101 transfers the effect control command from the transfer buffer to the analysis buffer (upper) and the analysis buffer (lower), While it is necessary to access the SDRAM 90116 connected by the bus, when the effect control command is transferred from the reception register to the delivery buffer, the serial communication circuit 90115 and the internal RAM 90112 connected by the internal bus are required. You can transfer data at high speed because you only need to access.

FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by a production control microcomputer 90100 (specifically, a production control CPU 90101) as a production control means mounted on the production control board 9080. When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 90101 starts execution of main processing. In the main processing, first, initialization processing for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation interval (for example, 1 ms) of effect control is performed (step S90701). . After that, the effect control CPU 90101 shifts to the loop processing for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (step S90702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 90101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 53). In the main process, if the timer interrupt flag is set, the effect control CPU 90101 clears the flag (step S90703) and executes the following effect control process.

In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 90101 first analyzes the received effect control command and sets a flag according to the received effect control command, etc. (command analysis process: step S90704).

Next, the effect control CPU 90101 performs effect control process processing (step S90705). In the production control process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (production control process flag) is selected from among the processes corresponding to the control state, and the display control of the production display device 909 is executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 90101 performs a fourth symbol process process (step S90706). In the fourth symbol process processing, among the processes according to the control state, the process corresponding to the current control state (fourth symbol process flag) is selected and the fourth symbol display areas 909c and 909d of the effect display device 909 are selected. Display control of the fourth symbol is executed.

Next, a random number updating process of updating the count value of the counter for generating a random number such as a jackpot symbol determining random number is executed (step S90707). After that, the process moves to step S90702.

When the timer interrupt occurs every 1 ms, the effect control CPU 90101 executes the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 53. In the timer interrupt process, the effect control CPU 90101 first executes an analysis buffer transfer process of transferring the effect control command stored in the delivery buffer to the analysis buffer (step S90711). Further, the effect control CPU 90101 sets a timer interrupt flag (step S90712).

In this embodiment, the case where the analysis buffer transfer process is executed in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 53 is shown, but only the timer interrupt flag is set in the timer interrupt process. The analysis buffer transfer process may be executed (for example, the analysis buffer transfer process may be executed between steps S90703 and S90704) within the loop process of steps S90702 to S90707 of the main process.

In addition, when the production control command is received from the game control microcomputer 90560 and a serial reception interrupt occurs, the production control CPU 90101 transfers the production control command stored in the reception register of the serial communication circuit 90115 to the buffer for delivery. Executes the transfer buffer transfer process for transfer. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the transfer buffer transfer processing executed when the serial reception interrupt occurs.

In the transfer buffer transfer process, the effect control CPU 90101 first reads the received effect control command from the reception register of the serial communication circuit 90115 (step S90721). Although the effect control command is composed of 2 bytes, the received effect control command is stored in the reception register of the serial communication circuit 90115 one byte at a time, and higher order data (MODE data) of the effect control command is stored. Since a serial reception interrupt occurs at the time of receiving each of the low-order data and the low-order data (EXT data), in step S90721, the effect control CPU 90101 causes the effect control received from the reception register of the serial communication circuit 90115. Read the command byte by byte. In this embodiment, the effect control command is assumed to be received upon reception of the upper data (MODE data) and the lower data (EXT data), and in step S90721, the effect control CPU 90101 generates a serial reception interrupt. Accordingly, the effect control commands are read in the order of the upper data (MODE data) and the lower data (EXT data).

Next, the effect control CPU 90101 writes the read effect control command (1 byte data) into the area indicated by the write pointer in the transfer buffer (step S90722). Further, the effect control CPU 90101 adds 1 to the value of the write pointer of the transfer buffer (step S90723).

Next, the effect control CPU 90101 confirms whether or not the effect control command received by the delivery buffer is full (step S90724). Specifically, the effect control CPU 90101 determines, for example, whether or not the value of the write pointer of the transfer buffer is in a state of catching up with the value of the read pointer, and the catching up state (that is, the unread area). If the next data is about to be written), it can be determined that the transfer buffer is full. If the delivery buffer is not full, the process moves to step S90735.

If the delivery buffer is full, the effect control CPU 90101 reads out the effect control command (1 byte of data) from the delivery buffer (step S90725). In this case, the effect control CPU 90101 temporarily stores the effect control command (1 byte of upper data (MODE data) or lower data (EXT data)) read in step S90725 in, for example, one of the data registers. Keep it. Further, the effect control CPU 90101 adds 1 to the value of the read pointer of the transfer buffer (step S90726).

Next, the effect control CPU 90101 confirms whether or not the read data is higher-order data (MODE data) of the effect control command (step S90727). Specifically, in this embodiment, the upper data (MODE data) of the effect control command is configured to always have a value in the range of 80(H) to FF(H), and the lower data (EXT data) is It is configured such that the value always falls within the range of 00(H) to 7F(H) (see FIG. 33). Therefore, in step S90727, the effect control CPU 90101 can determine that the read data is the upper data (MODE data) if the most significant bit is "1", and the most significant bit of the read data is "1". If it is "0", it can be determined that it is lower data (EXT data).

If the read data is lower data (EXT data) (N in step S90727: that is, in this embodiment, upper data (MODE data) and lower data (EXT data) are read in this order, so read The fact that the data is lower-order data (EXT data) means that one effect control command is read as a set of upper-order data (MODE data) and lower-order data (EXT data), and the effect control CPU 90101 The previously read upper data (MODE data) is written in the analysis buffer (upper) (step S90728), and the lower data read this time is written in the analysis buffer (lower) (step S90729). Further, the effect control CPU 90101 sets a writing completion flag indicating that writing of one effect control command with the upper data (MODE data) and the lower data (EXT data) to the analysis buffer is completed. (Step S90730). Then, the process proceeds to step S90732.

If the read data is upper data (MODE data) (Y in step S90727, that is, if the lower data (EXT data) has not been read yet), the effect control CPU 90101 resets the write completion flag ( Step S90731). Then, the process proceeds to step S90732.

By executing the processes of steps S90727 to S90731, in this embodiment, each time the performance control command is read out byte by byte, the upper data (MODE data) and the lower data (EXT data) are individually buffered for each analysis. Instead of controlling to store in (analysis buffer (upper) and analysis buffer (lower)), collect both upper data (MODE data) and lower data (EXT data) as a set Control is performed so that the data is stored in each analysis buffer (analysis buffer (upper) and analysis buffer (lower)).

Next, the effect control CPU 90101 confirms whether or not all the effect control commands stored in the delivery buffer have been read (step S90732). Specifically, the effect control CPU 90101 determines, for example, whether or not the value of the read pointer of the transfer buffer is in a state of catching up with the value of the write pointer. It can be determined that the reading of all the effect control commands stored in the use buffer has been completed. If an unread performance control command remains in the delivery buffer, the process returns to step S90725, and the performance control CPU 90101 executes the processes of steps S90725 to S90731 again.

If the reading of all the effect control commands stored in the delivery buffer has been completed, the effect control CPU 90101 confirms whether or not the write completion flag is set (step S90733). If the write completion flag is set (Y in step S90733), the transfer buffer transfer process is ended. If the write completion flag is not set (N in step S90733), only the upper data (MODE data) of the rendering control command read last from the transfer buffer is read, and the lower data (EXT data) is not read yet. This means that the data cannot be read and the transfer to the analysis buffer has not been completed. Therefore, in this case, the effect control CPU 90101 subtracts 1 from the value of the read pointer and returns the value by 1 (step S90734), and proceeds to step S90735.

Next, the effect control CPU 90101 confirms whether or not all the effect control commands stored in the reception register of the serial communication circuit 90115 have been read (step S90735). If an unread effect control command remains in the reception register, the effect control CPU 90101 returns to step S90721, and repeats the processing from step S90721. If no unread performance control command remains in the reception register, the transfer buffer transfer process is ended.

In this embodiment, as soon as an effect control command is received, it is transferred to the delivery buffer due to the occurrence of the serial reception interrupt, so that substantially two or more effect control commands are accumulated in the reception register of the serial communication circuit 90115. Although there are almost no cases, when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the game control microcomputer 90560 rises earlier than the effect control microcomputer 90100, and the effect control microcomputer 90100 is set. There may be a case where the effect control command is received from the game control microcomputer 90560 before the completion and is stored in the reception register. Even in such a case, by executing the process of step S90735, after the production control microcomputer 90100 is activated, when the production control command is first received and the serial reception interrupt occurs, this time. In addition to the received effect control commands, all effect control commands are read out, including the effect control commands that have already been received and stored in the reception register before the effect control microcomputer 90100 is activated, and are read into the transfer buffer. Transferred.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the analysis buffer transfer process (step S90711) executed in the timer interrupt process. In the analysis buffer transfer process, the effect control CPU 90101 confirms whether or not there is an unread effect control command in the transfer buffer (step S90741). Specifically, the effect control CPU 90101 determines, for example, whether the value of the read pointer of the delivery buffer is in a state of catching up with the value of the write pointer, and if it is in a state of delivery, it is for delivery. It can be determined that the reading of all the effect control commands stored in the buffer has been completed, and if not, it can be determined that there is an unread effect control command.

If there is an effect control command that has not been read (Y in step S90741), the effect control CPU 90101 reads out the effect control command (1 byte data) from the transfer buffer (step S90742). In this case, the effect control CPU 90101 temporarily stores the effect control command (1 byte of upper data (MODE data) or lower data (EXT data)) read in step S90742 in, for example, one of the data registers. Keep it. Further, the effect control CPU 90101 adds 1 to the value of the read pointer of the transfer buffer (step S90743).

Next, the effect control CPU 90101 confirms whether or not the read data is the higher order data (MODE data) of the effect control command (step S90744). Specifically, in this embodiment, the upper data (MODE data) of the effect control command is configured to always have a value in the range of 80(H) to FF(H), and the lower data (EXT data) is It is configured such that the value always falls within the range of 00(H) to 7F(H) (see FIG. 33). Therefore, in step S90744, the effect control CPU 90101 can determine that it is upper data (MODE data) if the most significant bit of the read data is “1”, and the most significant bit of the read data is “1”. If it is "0", it can be determined that it is lower data (EXT data).

If the read data is lower data (EXT data) (N in step S90744, that is, in this embodiment, upper data (MODE data) and lower data (EXT data) are read in this order, and thus read. The fact that the data is lower-order data (EXT data) means that one effect control command is read as a set of upper-order data (MODE data) and lower-order data (EXT data), and the effect control CPU 90101 The previously read upper data (MODE data) is written to the analysis buffer (upper) (step S90745), and the lower data read this time is written to the analysis buffer (lower) (step S90746). Further, the effect control CPU 90101 sets the writing completion flag (step S90747) and returns to step S90741.

If the read data is the upper data (MODE data) (Y in step S90744: that is, the lower data (EXT data) has not been read yet), the effect control CPU 90101 resets the write completion flag ( Step S90748), and returns to step S90741.

Then, the processes of steps S90741 to S90748 are repeatedly executed until the processes are completed for all the effect control commands stored in the delivery buffer.

If there is no unread production control command (N in step S90741), the production control CPU 90101 confirms whether or not the writing completion flag is set (step S90749). If the write completion flag is set (Y in step S90749), the analysis buffer transfer process ends. If the write completion flag is not set (N in step S90749), only the upper data (MODE data) is read from the delivery control command last read from the transfer buffer, and the lower data (EXT data) is not read yet. This means that the data cannot be read and the transfer to the analysis buffer has not been completed. Therefore, in this case, the effect control CPU 90101 subtracts 1 from the value of the read pointer and returns the value by 1 (step S90750), and ends the analysis buffer transfer processing.

The effect control command stored in the analysis buffer in the analysis buffer transfer process shown in FIG. 55 or the processes of steps S90725 to S90734 shown in FIG. 54 is analyzed in the command analysis process (see step S90704). That is, the effect control CPU 90101 reads and analyzes the effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 90560 and stored in the analysis buffer in the command analysis processing, and sets a flag according to the analyzed effect control command. Perform processing to do so.

FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing the effect control process process (step S90705) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process processing, the effect control CPU 90101 performs any one of steps S90800 to S90807 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed. In the production control process process, the display state of the production display device 909 is controlled and the variable display of the production symbol is realized, but the control regarding the variable display of the production symbol synchronized with the change of the first special symbol is also the second. The control related to the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the special symbol is also executed in one effect control process process. The variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the first special symbol and the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the second special symbol may be configured to be executed by another effect control process process. Good. Further, in this case, it may be possible to determine which special symbol variable display is being executed depending on which effect control process process is performing variable display of the effect symbol.

Fluctuating pattern command reception waiting process (step S90800): It is confirmed whether a varying pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 90560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the fluctuation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the variation pattern command is received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to the value corresponding to the effect pattern variation start processing (step S90801).

Production symbol variation start processing (step S90801): control is performed so that variation of the production symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the effect during the process of changing the effect symbol (step S90802).

Processing during production symbol fluctuation (step S90802): The switching timing of each fluctuation state (fluctuation speed) forming the fluctuation pattern is controlled, and the end of the fluctuation time is monitored. Then, when the variation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation stop processing (step S90803).

Production symbol variation stop processing (step S90803): The variation of the production symbol is stopped, and the control for deriving and displaying the display result (stopped symbol) is performed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit display process (step S90804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S90800).

Big hit display processing (step S90804): After the end of the variation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the big hit on the effect display device 909. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the in-round process (step S90805).

Processing during round (step S90805): Display control during round is performed. Then, when the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round has not ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the post-round processing (step S90806). If the final round has ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the big hit ending process (step S90807).

Post-round processing (step S90806): display control between rounds is performed. Then, when the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the in-round process (step S90805).

Big hit end production process (step S90807): In the production display device 909, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the variable pattern command reception waiting process (step S90800).

When the pre-reading notice effect is configured to be executable based on the pre-reading judgment command such as the symbol designation command or the variation category command (see FIG. 34) received from the game control microcomputer 90560, the effect control CPU 90101, In the effect control process process, the prefetching notice effect process of executing the prefetching notice effect based on the received symbol designating command or variation category command may be executed. In this case, for example, the effect control CPU 90101, as the prefetching notice effect, stops and displays the chance pattern or the like for a plurality of variations before the variation display of the notice target is started, changes the background image, and counts down. A continuous effect may be executed, such as performing an effect in such a manner as described above, or a hold announcement effect may be executed in which the hold display is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode.

As described above, according to this embodiment, the control means (in this example, the production control microcomputer 90100) for performing control based on the received command (in this example, the production control command), and the reception The first storage area (in this example, the receiving register included in the serial communication circuit 90115) in which the received command is first stored, and the second storage area in which the received command is temporarily stored (in this example, is provided in the internal RAM 90112). A transfer buffer) and a third storage area (in this example, an analysis buffer provided in the external SDRAM 90116) in which the received command is finally stored. Further, the control means reads the command stored in the first storage area and stores it in the second storage area based on a reception interrupt (in this example, a serial reception interrupt) that occurs each time a command is received. Then, the command stored in the second storage area is read out and stored in the third storage area based on a timer interrupt that occurs every predetermined period (1 ms in this example). Then, the control means analyzes the command stored in the third storage area (in this example, in the command analysis processing (see step S90704), the effect control command stored in the analysis buffer is analyzed). Therefore, when a large number of commands are received, it is possible to reduce the omission of commands.

Specifically, in the conventional gaming machine, with respect to the effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 90560, the effect control command is directly sent from the reception register of the serial communication circuit 90115 every time a timer interrupt occurs every 1 ms. It was read and transferred to the analysis buffer. Then, even if the production control command is received and stored in the reception register of the serial communication circuit 90115, the production control command is not read from the reception register until the timer interrupt occurs every 1 ms. If a large amount of effect control commands are received in the meantime, the capacity of the reception register of the serial communication circuit 90115 will be exceeded, and the effect control commands may be missed. In particular, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the same time, in the case where the start winning occurs and the pre-reading determination is made at the same timing as the variation start, the variation is caused. It is possible that a large number of commands at the start of fluctuations such as pattern commands and display result specification commands and pre-reading judgment commands such as symbol specification commands and fluctuation category commands will be sent at the same timing, and then within the same timer interrupt. There is a possibility that the total number of the effect control commands transmitted exceeds 20, the reception register of the serial communication circuit 90115 overflows, and the effect control commands may be missed.

Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51, a transfer buffer is further provided in the built-in RAM 90112 in addition to the analysis buffer, and the serial communication circuit 90115 of the serial communication circuit 90115 is immediately generated each time a serial reception interrupt occurs. The production control command is transferred from the reception register to the delivery buffer, and thereafter, the production control command is further transferred from the delivery buffer to the analysis buffer at each timer interruption every 1 ms. With such a configuration, in this embodiment, when a large amount of effect control commands are received, it is possible to prevent the reception register of the serial communication circuit 90115 from overflowing and reduce the omission of effect control commands. ing.

Further, according to this embodiment, the second storage area is provided in the RAM incorporated in the control means (in this example, as shown in FIG. 51, the internal RAM 90112 is provided with a transfer buffer. ). Therefore, the command can be transferred from the first storage area to the second storage area at high speed. That is, since it is only necessary to access the built-in RAM connected by the internal bus, it is possible to transfer data at high speed.

Further, according to this embodiment, the second storage area has a larger storage capacity than the first storage area, and the third storage area has a larger storage capacity than the second storage area (this example). Then, as shown in FIG. 51, the capacity of the reception register of the serial communication circuit 90115 is 16 bytes, whereas the capacity of the transfer buffer is large at 128 bytes, and the analysis buffer (upper) and the analysis buffer ( (Lower) has a larger capacity of 256 bytes each). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the missed command by increasing the storage capacity of the transfer destination storage area.

Further, according to this embodiment, when the capacity of the command stored in the second storage area reaches the maximum value of the storage capacity of the second storage area, regardless of the occurrence of the timer interruption, The command stored in the second storage area is read out and stored in the third storage area (in this example, as shown in FIG. 54, in the transfer buffer transfer processing, if the transfer buffer is full, steps S90725 to S90725). The process of S90734 is executed to transfer the effect control command from the transfer buffer to the analysis buffer). Therefore, when the second storage area is full, the command can be alleviated by moving the command to the third storage area as much as possible.

In this embodiment, the capacity of the transfer buffer is 128 bytes, and a maximum of 64 effect control commands can be stored. It seems that the transfer buffer is rarely full. Therefore, in the transfer buffer transfer process shown in FIG. 54, the processes of steps S90725 to S90734 may be omitted.

Further, in this embodiment, when the transfer buffer becomes full, all the effect control commands in which the upper data (MODE data) and the lower data (EXT data) are stored as a set are transferred from the transfer buffer to the analysis buffer. Although the case of transferring is shown, the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and only some of the effect control commands may be transferred from the transfer buffer to the analysis buffer. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the omission of the effect control command to some extent when the delivery buffer becomes full.

Further, according to this embodiment, the third storage area is a first area (in this example, an analysis buffer (upper)) that stores upper data of a command and a second area that stores lower data of the command. (In this example, the analysis buffer (lower level)) is included. Then, the upper data of the command read from the second storage area is stored in the first area, and the lower data of the command read from the second storage area is stored in the second area (see steps S90745 and S90746 in FIG. 55). Therefore, missed commands in the second storage area can be reduced. Further, the data transfer speed can be improved by increasing the data flow path at the time of transfer by dividing the area for storing the upper data of the command and the area for storing the lower data.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the effect control command is transferred from the reception register of the serial communication circuit 90115 to the transfer buffer, it is directly transferred to the common transfer buffer without being divided into upper data and lower data. It is configured to do. With such a configuration, in this embodiment, it is possible to prevent the processing load from increasing on the contrary when transferring to the transfer buffer for each serial reception interrupt.

In this embodiment, when the serial reception interrupt occurs, the production control command stored in the reception register of the serial communication circuit 90115 is immediately read and transferred to the delivery buffer. It is not limited to the mode. For example, in this embodiment, the reception register of the serial communication circuit 90115 is also provided with a capacity of 16 bytes, can store a maximum of eight effect control commands, and the capacity of the transfer buffer is 128 bytes, which is a certain margin. Therefore, it is possible to read the effect control command stored in the reception register of the serial communication circuit 90115 and transfer it to the delivery buffer based on the occurrence of the predetermined number of serial reception interrupts. Good. Hereinafter, a modified example in which the effect control command is transferred to the delivery buffer based on the occurrence of the predetermined number of serial reception interrupts will be described.

FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing a modification of the transfer buffer transfer process executed when a serial reception interrupt occurs. In the modified example shown in FIG. 57, in the transfer buffer transfer processing, the effect control CPU 90101 first increments the value of the interrupt number counter for counting the number of serial reception interrupt occurrences (step S90751). Next, the effect control CPU 90101 confirms whether or not the value of the interrupt number counter after addition has reached a predetermined number (10 in this example) (step S90752). In this embodiment, the case where the predetermined number is 10 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and whether the value of the interrupt number counter has reached 5 or 15 as the predetermined number, for example. May be confirmed. At least in this embodiment, since the capacity of the reception register of the serial communication circuit 90115 is 16 bytes, the predetermined number is set to be a value (16 in this example) or less corresponding to the capacity of the reception register. It should be fixed.

If the value of the interrupt number counter has not reached the predetermined number, the transfer buffer transfer process is directly terminated without proceeding to the process of step S90753 and thereafter. If the value of the interrupt number counter has reached a predetermined number, the effect control CPU 90101 clears the value of the interrupt number counter (step S90753). Then, the processing shifts to steps S90721 to S90723, and processing for transferring the effect control command stored in the reception register of the serial communication circuit 90115 to the delivery buffer is executed. Note that, in FIG. 57, the processes of steps S90721 to S90723 are the same as those shown in FIG. 54. Further, in FIG. 57, the processing of steps S90724 to S90735 is also similar to the processing shown in FIG. 54.

According to the modified example shown in FIG. 57, the command stored in the first storage area is read out and stored in the second storage area based on the occurrence of the reception interrupt of a predetermined number of times (10 times in this example). Store (in this example, as shown in FIG. 57, when it is determined to be Y in step S90752, the processing shifts to steps S90721 to S90723, and the effect control command stored in the reception register of the serial communication circuit 90115 is stored. Execute the process of transferring to the transfer buffer). Therefore, by performing the process of transferring the command from the first storage area to the second storage area only once every predetermined number of reception interrupts, the processing time for each interrupt can be shortened. As described above, in this example, the capacity of the reception register of the serial communication circuit 90115 is set to 16 bytes, and the capacity of the transfer buffer is also set to 128 bytes. There is no problem even with data transfer for each interrupt.

In the above embodiment, when the effect control microcomputer 90100 stores the effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 90560, it is temporarily transferred from the reception register of the serial communication circuit 90115 to the transfer buffer, Although the case where the data is finally transferred to the analysis buffer is shown, the invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, when the payout control command that the game control microcomputer 90560 and the payout control microcomputer mutually transmit and receive are stored, the configuration shown in the above embodiment is applied, and the received payout control command is serial communication circuit. The transfer register may be temporarily transferred from the reception register to the transfer buffer and finally transferred to the analysis buffer. Further, for example, when the VDP 90109 stores a command received from the effect control microcomputer 90100, the configuration described in the above embodiment is applied, and the received command is temporarily transferred from the reception register of the serial communication circuit to the transfer buffer. The data may be transferred and finally transferred to the analysis buffer.

In the above-described embodiment, in order to notify the effect control microcomputer 90100 of a change pattern indicating a change time and a change mode such as the type of reach effect and the presence/absence of pseudo-relation, 1 is set when the change is started. Although an example in which one fluctuation pattern command is transmitted has been shown, the fluctuation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer 90100 by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer 90560 uses the first command to determine whether or not there is a pseudo-relation and whether or not there is a sliding effect (before the reach, the so-called so-called A command indicating the change time and change mode before the second stop) is transmitted, and the second command indicates the type of reach and the presence/absence of re-lottery production, etc., after the reach (so-called the first case if the reach is not reached). You may make it transmit the command which shows the fluctuation|variation time of (after 2 stop) or a fluctuation mode. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 90100 may perform effect control in the variable display based on the variable time derived from the combination of the two commands. It should be noted that the gaming control microcomputer 90560 notifies the variation time by each of two commands, and the specific variation mode executed at each timing is selected by the production control microcomputer 90100. You can When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after a predetermined period has elapsed after sending the first command (for example, the next timer interrupt). (In) the second command may be transmitted. It should be noted that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the transmission order can be changed as appropriate. By thus notifying the variation pattern by using two or more commands, it is possible to reduce the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern command.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, “different ratios” are not limited to those having different ratios due to the relationship such as A:B=70%:30% or A:B=30%:70%. It is a concept including a relationship in which the ratio is different due to the relationship such as A:B=100%:0% (that is, one allocation is 100% and the other allocation is 0%).

Further, in the above embodiment, the production control board 9080, the audio output board 9070, and the lamp driver board 9035 are provided as the boards on which the circuit for controlling the production apparatus is mounted. You may mount on one board. Furthermore, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 909 and the like is mounted, and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (a lamp, an LED, a speaker 9027, etc.) are installed. You may make it provide two boards, such as two effect control boards.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the game control microcomputer 90560 directly sends a command to the effect control microcomputer 90100, but the game control microcomputer 90560 may use another board (for example, FIG. 29). Sound output lamp 9070, lamp driver board 9035, or the like, or a sound/lamp board having the function of the circuit mounted on the sound output board 9070 and the function of the circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 9035. You may make it transmit a control command and may be made to be transmitted to the microcomputer 90100 for effect control in the effect control board 9080 via another board. In that case, the command may be simply passed through on another board, or control means such as a microcomputer may be mounted on the voice output board 9070, the lamp driver board 9035, and the sound/lamp board so that the control means receives the command. In response to this, control related to voice control or lamp control is executed, and the received command is changed as it is or is changed to, for example, a simplified command to control the effect display device 909. It may be transmitted to. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 90100 performs the display control according to the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 90560 in the above-described embodiment, similarly to the sound output board 9070 and the lamp driver. Display control can be performed in response to commands received from the board 9035 or the sound/lamp board.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a pachinko machine is used as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention sets a predetermined bet number by inserting a medal, and a plurality of types of gaming machines are operated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player. When the symbol is rotated and the symbol is stopped according to the operation of the stop button by the player, if the stop symbol combination becomes a specific symbol combination, a predetermined number of medals are applied to the player. It is also possible. For example, with respect to slot machines, similarly, a production control command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer to the production control microcomputer, and a payout control command is transmitted and received between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer. Or the commands are transmitted from the effect control microcomputer to the VDP, the configuration shown in the above embodiment is applied when receiving these commands, and the received commands are received by the serial communication circuit. The register may be temporarily transferred to the transfer buffer and finally transferred to the analysis buffer.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the one using the game medium as the game machine is taken as an example, but the game machine according to the present invention is not limited to the game machine for paying out a predetermined number of game media as prizes, and a game ball It can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that encloses a game medium such as, and gives a score when the condition for giving a prize is satisfied.

Further, in the above embodiment, there are probability variation big hit and normal big hit as the big hit type, and based on the fact that it was decided as the probability variation big hit as the big hit type, the gaming machine controlled to the probability variation state after the big hit game is shown. , But is not limited to such a gaming machine. For example, a special variable winning ball device having a predetermined probability variation region provided therein (the probability variable region may be provided in only one special variable winning ball device, or a plurality of special variable winning balls are provided). Probability variation area may be provided in part of the device), the probability variation is determined based on the game ball passing through the probability variation area in the special variable winning ball device during the big hit game, and the big hit game It is also possible to apply the configuration shown in the above-described embodiment to a gaming machine that is controlled to the probable state after the end.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, for example, a plurality of types of special symbols and effect symbols of "1" to "9" are variably displayed and the display result is derived and displayed, or a plurality of types of "○" and "x" are ordinary. Although the case where the symbols are variably displayed and the display result is derived and displayed is shown, the variable display is not limited to such a mode. For example, the variably displayed symbol does not necessarily have to be the same as the derivatized displayed symbol, and a symbol different from the variably displayed symbol may be derived and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and the variable display may be performed using only one type of symbol. In this case, for example, the variable display may be executed by alternately lighting and blinking the one type of symbol display. And, even in this case, one type of symbol used for the variable display may be finally displayed and displayed, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol may be finally displayed and displayed. It may be one.

Further, in the above embodiment, the game control microcomputer 90560 side determines whether or not to be a big hit and the winning determination of the variation pattern type (pre-reading determination), and a command (symbol designating command) indicating the winning determination result. , Variable category command), and the effect control microcomputer 90100 side may be configured to be able to execute the pre-reading notice effect based on the command indicating the winning determination result. Not limited to the aspect, for example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 side may be configured to perform the winning determination (prefetch determination). In this case, for example, the game control microcomputer 90560 transmits a command that specifies only the value of the big hit determination random number (random R') and the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2') extracted when the start winning occurs. In this way, the effect control microcomputer 90100 may be configured to perform the winning determination (prefetch determination) based on the value of the random number designated by those commands.

The present invention is preferably applied to a gaming machine capable of performing variable display.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special pattern display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Ordinary winning ball device 6B ... Ordinary variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R Speaker 9 Game effect lamp 11 Main board 12 Production control board 13 Voice control board 14 Lamp control board 15 Relay board 20 Normal pattern display 21 Gate switch 22A, 22B Start switch 23 Count switch 31A... Stick controller 31B... Push button 100... Game control microcomputers 101, 121... ROM
102, 122... RAM
103... CPU
104, 124... Random number circuits 105, 125... I/O
120... CPU for production control
123... Display control unit 901... Pachinko gaming machine 908a... First special symbol display device 908b... Second special symbol display device 909... Performance display device 909a... First reserved memory display unit 909b... Second reserved memory display unit 9013... 1 start winning a prize hole 9014 ... second starting winning a prize port 9020 ... special variable winning a prize ball device 9031 ... game control board (main board)
9051... Serial communication circuit 9056... CPU
90560 ... game control microcomputer 9080 ... production control board 90100 ... production control microcomputer 90101 ... production control CPU
90109... VDP
90111... Built-in ROM
90112... Built-in RAM
90114... Interrupt controller 90115... Serial communication circuit 90116... SDRAM

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of executing variable display,
A specific display means capable of displaying a specific display regarding variable display,
By causing an effect image to act on the specific display, an effect effect executing unit capable of executing an effect effect that changes the display mode of the specific display,
Control means for controlling based on the received command,
A first storage area in which the received command is first stored,
A second storage area in which the received command is temporarily stored,
A third storage area in which the received command is finally stored,
The control means is
First storage control means for reading out a command stored in the first storage area and storing it in the second storage area based on a reception interrupt generated each time a command is received;
Second storage control means for reading out a command stored in the second storage area and storing the command in the third storage area based on a timer interrupt that occurs every predetermined period;
Analysis means for analyzing a command stored in the third storage area,
The action effect executing means changes the start position of the action effect according to the display position of the specific display that is the execution target of the action effect,
The starting position of the working effect is more, the starting position of the working effect is rather easy becomes farther from near position from the specific display of the display position of the execution target of the action effect more of,
As the pattern of the action effect, the first pattern in which the aspect of the effect image does not change before the effect image of the first aspect is displayed and the specific display is operated, and the expectation degree higher than that of the effect image of the first aspect A second pattern in which the aspect of the effect image does not change until the effect image of two aspects is displayed and applied to the specific display, and the aspect of the effect image before the effect image of the first aspect is displayed and applied to the specific display And a third pattern in which is changed to the second aspect,
A gaming machine characterized in that an expectation is higher in the action effect of the third pattern than in the action effect of the second pattern .